Air Cylinder New

ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63, ø 80, ø 100 RoHS

Female rod end

available as
Selectable
standard

Rod end styles Female thread Male thread

suitable for the

application can
be selected.

Easy fine adjustment of auto switch position No trunnion mounting female thread
Fine adjustment of the auto switch position added to basic type variation
is possible by simply loosening the screw
No foreign matter accumulation due
attached to the auto switch.
to the simple construction
Transparent switch bracket improves
visibility of indicator LED. No trunnion mounting female thread
Fine adjustment of auto switch

LED colour indicator

Screw attached to auto switch Switch bracket

New Direct mount, non-rotating rod type (CG1KR-Z) is added.

The models with rod end bracket and/or

pivot bracket part numbers are expanded.
¡CG1-Z
CG1 Z (Si
(Single
l acting),
ti ) CG1K
CG1K-Z,
Z CG1R
CG1R-Z,
Z CG1KR
CG1KR-Z,
Z CG1Y
CG1Y-Z
Z

Series CG1
CAT.EUS20-224C-UK
Air Cylinder

Part numbers with rod end bracket and/or pivot bracket available
Not necessary to order a bracket for the applicable cylinder separately
Note) Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product, but not assembled.

Example) CDG1 D N20-50Z- N W -M9BW

Mounting

Pivot bracket N: Kit of pivot bracket Kit of pivot bracket Rod end bracket With rod end bracket
— None and clevis and trunnion — None V: Single W: Double
knuckle joint knuckle joint
Pivot bracket is V Single knuckle joint
shipped together
N with the product, W Double knuckle joint
but not assembled.
∗ Applicable to only mounting D,
U and T.

Pivot bracket
Various mounting bracket options
s3UITABLEMOUNTINGBRACKETSCANBESELECTEDFOR Clevis
the installation condition.
s)MPROVEDAMOUNTOFMOUNTINGFREEDOM

Head trunnion
Head flange
Basic
Single knuckle joint

Rod trunnion
Axial foot

Double knuckle joint

Basic (No trunnion mounting female thread)

Rod flange

Axial foot

Easy fine adjustment of auto switch position No environmental hazardous

substances used
Fine adjustment of the auto switch set position can be performed by loosening the Compliant with EU RoHS directive.
auto switch attached screw without loosening the auto switch mounting band. Lead free bushing is used as sliding material.
Operability improved compared with the conventional auto switch set position
adjustment, where the complete switch mounting Screw attached to auto switch Specifications, performance and
band requires loosening. mounting method are same as the
Switch bracket existing product.
Auto switch
Grease is selectable. (Option)
쐌 Grease for food processing equipment (XC85)
Switch holder 쐌 PTFE grease (X446)
Visibility of the indicator
LED improved with the Water resistant compact auto
transparent resin switch bracket
(Standard specification)
switch now available
쐌 Solid state auto switch D-M9첸A(V)

Auto switch mounting screw

Auto switch mounting band

1
 Series CG1
Stroke Variations [mm]
Standard stroke
Bore size [mm]
25 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300
20
25
32
40
50
63
80
100

Series Variations
Bore size [mm] Variations
Series Action Type Cushion With Clean Page
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Air-hydro
rod boot series
Standard Rubber
CG1-Z bumper
Double
Single rod Page 5
acting
Air
cushion

Rubber
bumper
Double
Double rod Page 23
acting
Air
cushion

Single rod
Single Rubber
(Spring return Page 31
acting bumper
/extend)
Non-rotating rod Rubber
CG1K-Z bumper
Double
acting Single rod Page 38
Air
cushion

Double Rubber
Double rod Page 43
acting bumper

Direct mount Rubber

CG1R-Z bumper
Double
Single rod Page 47
acting
Air
cushion

Direct mount,
Double Rubber
Non-rotating rod Single rod Page 52
acting bumper
CG1KR-Z
With end lock Rubber
CBG1 bumper
Double
Single rod Page 56
acting
Air
cushion

Smooth Cylinder Double Rubber

CG1Y-Z Single rod
acting bumper

Series CG3
www.smc.eu
Short type
Double Rubber
Standard Single rod
acting bumper
CG3

2
 Combinations of Standard Products and Made to Order Specifications
Series CG1

: Standard Series CG1 CG1K

: Made to Order (Standard type) (Non-rotating rod type)
: Special product (Please contact SMC for details.) Action/
— : Not available Double acting Single acting Double acting
Type
Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Double rod
Cushion
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air Rubber
Page
Page 5 Page 23 Page 31 Page 38 Page 43
Symbol Specifications Applicable bore size ø 20 to ø 100 ø 20 to ø 40 ø 20 to ø 63 ø 40 to ø 63 ø 20 to ø 63
Standard Standard
Note 10) Note 10) Note 10)
Long st Long stroke ø 20 to ø 100
D Built-in magnet
CG1 F With One-touch fittings Note 15) ø 20 to ø 63
J
CG1 - K With rod boot ø 20 to ø 100 Note 11) Note 11) Note 11) Note 11)

CG1 H Air-hydro type ø 20 to ø 63 — — — — — —

10- Clean series ø 20 to ø 100 Note 1) Note 1)
— — —
25A- Note 9) Copper (Cu) and Zinc (Zn)-free Note 15) ø 20 to ø 100
20- Note 9) Copper Note 8) and Fluorine-free ø 20 to ø 100
R
CG1 V Water resistant ø 32 to ø 100 — — —
CG1 M Cylinder with stable lubrication function (Lube-retainer) ø 20 to ø 100 — — — —
XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (−10 to 150 °C) Note 7) Note 2) Note 2)
— — —
Note 2)
XB7 Cold resistant cylinder (−40 to 70 °C) Note 7) Note 2)
Note 5) — — —
ø 20 to ø 100
XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s) — — — —
XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s) — — — —
XC4 With heavy duty scraper ø 32 to ø 63 — — —
XC6 Made of stainless steel ø 20 to ø 100 Note 6)
— — —
XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type — — —
XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type — — —
XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type ø 20 to ø 63 — — —
XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type — — — —
XC12 Tandem cylinder — — — Note 15)

XC13 Auto switch rail mounting ø 20 to ø 100

XC20 Head cover axial port ø 20 to ø 63 — — —
XC22 Fluororubber seal Note 2) Note 2)

Double clevis and double knuckle joint

XC27 pins made of stainless steel ø 20 to ø 100

XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin Note 6)

XC35 With coil scraper — — —

XC37 Larger throttle diameter of connection port
ø 20 to ø 63
Built-in shock absorber in head cover
XC42 side
— — —

XC85 Grease for food processing equipment ø 20 to ø 100

X446 PTFE grease ø 20 to ø 100 — — —
Note 1) ø 40 to ø 63 only
Note 2) Without bumper
Note 3) ø 32 to ø 100 only
Note 4) SV type only (Heat resistant grease is used.)
Note 5) ø 20 to ø 63 only
Note 6) Single acting/spring return type (S) only
Note 7) The products with an auto switch are not compatible.

3
 Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
CG1KR CBG1 Note 15) CG1쏔Y Note 12)
CG1R (Direct mount,
(Direct mount type) (With end lock) (Smooth Cylinder)
Non-rotating rod type)
Double acting Double acting Double acting Double acting

Double Acting, Double Rod

Single rod Single rod Single rod Single rod

CG1W
Standard
Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air —
Page 47 Page 52 Page 56 —
ø 20 to ø 63 ø 20 to ø 63 ø 20 to ø 100 ø 20 to ø 100 Symbol
      Standard

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

      Note 10) Long st
      D

CG1
      CG1쏔F
      CG1쏔-쏔JK
 — — — — — CG1쏔H
   

Double Acting, Single Rod

— — 10-
      25A- Note 9)

CG1K
     — 20- Note 9)
    CG1쏔RV

Non-rotating Rod
— —
  — — — — CG1쏔M
Note 2)
—   — XB6

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
Note 2)
Note 15)  — — — — XB7
Note 15)
 —   — XB9
Note 15)
 — — — — XB13
  —   — XC4
—   XC6

Double Acting, Single Rod

  Note 13)  Note 13) 

Direct Mount
Note 15)
XC8

CG1R
 Note 15)
 Note 14)  Note 14)  XC9
      XC10
      XC11
     — XC12

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

   XC13

CG1KR
 Note 15)
  XC20
Note 2)
    — XC22

     XC27
With End Lock

      XC29
CBG1

  —   — XC35
      XC37

     — XC42
Auto Switch

   — XC85
  — — — — X446
Note 8) Copper-free for the externally exposed part
Note 9) For details, refer to www.smc.eu.
Note 10) Long stroke is beyond the performance guarantee.
Made to Order

Note 11) Female rod end is available as a special order.

Note 12) For details about the smooth cylinder, refer to www.smc.eu.
Note 13) Available only for locking at head end.
Note 14) Available only for locking at rod end.
Note 15) The shape is the same as the existing product.

4
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod

Series CG1 RoHS

ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63, ø 80, ø 100
00
How to Order

CG1 B N 20 100 Z
With auto switch CDG1 B N 20 100 Z M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Bore size Pivot bracket Made to Order
Mounting 20 20 mm — None For details, refer to page 6.
B Basic 25 25 mm Pivot bracket is shipped together
N Number of auto switches
Z∗ Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread) 32 32 mm with the product, but not assembled
— 2 pcs.
L Axial foot 40 40 mm ∗ Only for D, U, T mounting types
∗ Pivot bracket is shipped together S 1 pc.
F Rod flange 50 50 mm n “n” pcs.
with the product, but not assembled.
G Head flange 63 63 mm
U∗ Rod trunnion 80 80 mm Rod end bracket Auto switch
T∗ Head trunnion 100 100 mm — None — Without auto switch
D Clevis V Single knuckle joint ∗ For applicable auto switches,
∗ Not available for ø 80 and ø 100. Type W Double knuckle joint refer to the table below.
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with N Rubber bumper ∗ No bracket is provided for the female rod end.
the product, but not assembled. A Air cushion ∗ Rod end bracket is shipped together with the product, but not assembled.
∗ The cylinder for F, G, L, D mounting types is Z:
∗ A knuckle joint pin is not provided with the single knuckle joint.
Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread).
Port thread type Suffix for cylinder (Rod boot)
Rubber bumper Air cushion Rod end thread — Without rod boot
M5 x 0.8 ø 20, ø 25
— Male rod end
J Nylon tarpaulin
— Rc ø 20 to ø 100
Rc ø 32 to ø 100 K Heat resistant tarpaulin
F Female rod end
TN NPT ø 20 to ø 100 NPT∗ ø 32 to ø 100 ∗ In the case of w/rod boot, and a foot bracket or
M5 x 0.8 ø 20, ø 25 G∗ ø 32 to ø 100 Cylinder stroke [mm] rod flange as a bracket, those parts are to be
TF G ø 32 to ø 100 ∗ Not available for ø 20 and ø 25. assembled at the time of shipment.
Refer to “Standard Strokes” on page 6.
∗ For female rod end, no rod boot is provided.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Auto switch model

Load voltage Lead wire length [m]
Special Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired Applicable
Type
function entry (Output) ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100 0.5 1 3 5 None connector load
DC AC
Perpendicular In-line In-line (—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
M9NV M9N —     — 
3-wire (NPN)
— — G59  —   —  IC
5 V, 12 V
M9PV M9P —     —  circuit
Grommet 3-wire (PNP)
— — — G5P  —   — 
M9BV M9B —     — 
Solid state auto switch

2-wire 12 V — — K59  —   —  —
Connector — H7C —  —    —
M9NWV M9NW —     — 
3-wire (NPN)
— — G59W  —   —  IC Relay,
Yes 24 V 5 V, 12 V —
Diagnostic indication M9PWV M9PW —     —  circuit PLC
3-wire (PNP)
(2-colour indication) — — G5PW  —   — 
M9BWV M9BW —     — 
2-wire 12 V —
Grommet — — K59W  —   — 
3-wire (NPN)
5 V, 12 V
M9NAV∗∗∗ M9NA∗∗∗ —     —  IC
Water resistant 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗∗ M9PA∗∗∗ —     —  circuit
(2-colour indication)
2-wire 12 V
M9BAV∗∗∗ M9BA∗∗∗ —     — 
—
— — G5BA∗∗∗ — —   — 
With diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF G59F  —   —  IC circuit
3-wire (Equiv. to NPN) — 5V — A96V A96 —  —  — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

Yes
100 V A93V A93 —  —   — — —
Grommet No 100 V or less A90V A90 —  —  — — — IC circuit
— Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —
PLC
Yes — — C73C —  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C —  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
A water-resistant type cylinder is recommended for use in an environment which requires water resistance. However, please contact SMC for water-resistant cylinder of ø 20 and ø 25.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· — (Example) M9NW 5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM None··············· N (Example) H7CN produced upon receipt of order.
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
5
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Specifications

CG1
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Action Double acting, Single rod
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air

Double Acting, Double Rod

Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa

CG1W
Standard
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C
(No freezing)
temperature With auto switch : –10 °C to 60 °C
Symbol Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 50 to 700 mm/s
+1.4 +1.8
Stroke length tolerance Up to 1000 st 0 mm, Up to 1500 st 0 mm

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Rubber bumper Air cushion
Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion

CG1
Basic, Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread),
Mounting∗∗ Axial foot, Rod flange, Head flange, Rod trunnion, Head
trunnion, Clevis (used for changing the port location by 90°)

Male
0.28 0.41 0.66 1.20 2.00 3.40 5.90 9.90
Rubber rod end

Double Acting, Single Rod

bumper Female
Made to Order Allowable 0.11 0.18 0.29 0.52 0.91 1.54 2.71 4.54
rod end

CG1K
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.) kinetic
energy Male R: 0.35 R: 0.56
Symbol Specifications 0.91 1.80 3.40 4.90 11.80 16.70
(J) rod end H: 0.42 H: 0.65
Air

Non-rotating Rod
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
cushion
-XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (–10 to 150 °C)∗1 Female
0.11 0.18 0.29 0.52 0.91 1.54 2.71 4.54
rod end
-XB7 Cold resistant cylinder (–40 to 70 °C)∗2
∗ R: Rod side, H: Head side

Double Acting, Double Rod

-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)∗3
∗∗ Cylinder sizes ø 80 and ø 100 do not have basic (without trunnion mounting female thread), rod

CG1KW
-XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)∗3 trunnion and head trunnion types. Foot, flange and clevis types of cylinder sizes from ø 20 to ø
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper 63 do not have trunnion mounting female thread. Operate the cylinder within the allowable kinetic
-XC6 Made of stainless steel energy.
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type Accessories
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
Axial Rod Head Rod Head

CG1R
-XC12 Tandem cylinder∗3 Mounting Basic
foot flange flange trunnion trunnion
Clevis
-XC13 Auto switch rail mounting
Rod end nut       
-XC20 Head cover axial port∗3 Standard
Clevis pin — — — — — — 
-XC22 Fluororubber seal∗1
Single knuckle joint       
-XC27 Double clevis and double knuckle joint pins made of stainless steel
Double knuckle joint

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

      
-XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin
Option (with pin)∗∗

CG1KR
-XC35 With coil scraper
Pivot bracket∗ — — — — ∗ ∗ 
-XC37 Larger throttle diameter of connection port
Rod boot       
-XC42 Built-in shock absorber in head cover side
∗ Not available for ø 80 and ø 100.
-XC85 Grease for food processing equipment ∗∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are shipped together.
-X446 PTFE grease∗3

∗1 Cylinders with rubber bumper have no bumper.

∗2 Only compatible with cylinders with rubber
Standard Strokes
With End Lock

CBG1

bumper, but has no bumper. [mm]

∗3 Only compatible with cylinders with rubber Bore size Standard stroke Note1) Maximum manufacturable stroke Note 2)
bumper.
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 201 to 1500
25
Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with 32
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125,
Auto Switch

auto switches. 301 to 1500

50, 63 150, 200, 250, 300
• Auto switch proper mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting 80
height 100
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order. Manufacture of
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no. intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
• Operating range Note 2) The maximum manufacturable stroke shows the long stroke.
Made to Order

• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/Auto Note 3) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to “Air
switch mounting surfaces Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the products that exceed the standard stroke
might not be able to fulfill the specifications due to the deflection etc.

6
Series CG1

Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly Rod Boot Material

Clevis Maximum operating
Cylinder model: CDG1DN20-100Z-NW-M9BW Symbol Rod boot material
temperature
Auto switch J Nylon tarpaulin 70 °C
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110 °C∗
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod
boot itself.
Mounting D: Clevis
Pivot bracket N: Yes
Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint Pivot bracket
Auto switch D-M9BW: 2 pcs.

∗ Pivot bracket, double knuckle joint and auto

switch are shipped together with the product, but
not assembled. Double knuckle joint

Mounting Brackets/Part No.

Mounting Order Bore size [mm]
Contents
bracket q’ty 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
2 foots,
Axial foot 2 Note 1) CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040 CG-L050 CG-L063 CG-L080 CG-L100
8 mounting bolts
1 flange,
Flange 1 CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040 CG-F050 CG-F063 CG-F080 CG-F100
4 mounting bolts
2 trunnion pins, 2 trunnion bolts,
Trunnion pin 1 CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040 CG-T050 CG-T063 — —
2 flat washers
1 clevis, 4 mounting bolts,
Clevis 1 CG-D020 CG-D025 CG-D032 CG-D040 CG-D050 CG-D063 CG-D080 CG-D100
1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings

Pivot bracket Note 2) 1 CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A CG-050-24A CG-063-24A CG-080-24A CG-100-24A 1 pivot bracket

Note 1) Order two foots per cylinder.

Note 2) Can be combined with the trunnion pin and the clevis.

Mounting Brackets, Accessories/Material, Surface Treatment

Segment Description Material Surface treatment
Foot Carbon steel Nickel plating
Carbon steel (ø 20 to ø 63) Nickel plating
Flange
Cast iron (ø 80, ø 100) Nickel plating
Mounting Carbon steel (ø 20 to ø 63) Nickel plating
Clevis
brackets Cast iron (ø 80, ø 100) Nickel plating
Trunnion pin Carbon steel Salt-bath nitrocarburising
Trunnion pin Trunnion bolt Carbon steel Nickel plating
Flat washer Carbon steel Nickel plating
Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated
Carbon steel (ø 20 to ø 32) Nickel plating
Single knuckle joint
Cast iron (ø 40 to ø 100) Zinc chromated
Carbon steel (ø 20 to ø 32) Nickel plating
Double knuckle joint
Cast iron (ø 40 to ø 100) Zinc chromated
Accessories Knuckle pin Carbon steel —
Clevis pin Carbon steel —
Carbon steel (ø 20 to ø 63) Nickel plating
Pivot bracket
Cast iron (ø 80, ø 100) Nickel plating
Mounting bolt Carbon steel Nickel plating
Retaining ring Carbon tool steel Phosphate coating

Mounting Procedure
Mounting procedure for trunnion Mounting procedure for clevis
Follow the procedures below when mounting a Follow the procedures below when mounting a pivot bracket on the clevis.
pivot bracket on the trunnion. Trunnion bolt (With
scotch grip) 4 or 5
times remounting
ø 20 to ø 63 Cylinder body possible ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100
Retaining Clevis pin Cylinder Retaining
Retaining Clevis pin Cylinder body Retaining body
ring (Put grease) ring
ring (Put grease) ring
Flat washer
Trunnion pin
(Put grease on the exterior.)
Pivot bracket

Pivot bracket
Pivot bracket

7
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Weights

Double Acting, Single Rod

[kg]

CG1
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic (B) 0.11 0.17 0.24 0.44 0.79 1.06 2.07 3.16
Basic weight

Basic (Z) 0.11 0.17 0.25 0.45 0.80 1.09 — —

Axial foot 0.21 0.29 0.40 0.67 1.26 1.77 3.04 4.91
Flange 0.18 0.26 0.38 0.65 1.16 1.64 2.78 4.44

Double Acting, Double Rod

Trunnion 0.12 0.19 0.28 0.49 0.88 1.20 — —
Clevis 0.17 0.25 0.39 0.68 1.19 1.78 2.77 4.44

CG1W
Standard
Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25 0.44 0.80 0.98 1.75
Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22 0.39 0.57
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26 0.64 1.31
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.14 0.21 0.25 0.35 0.50
Additional weight for switch magnet 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.04
Additional weight with air cushion 0 0.01 0.04 0 0.01 0.04 0 0.04

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Weight reduction for female rod end −0.01 −0.02 −0.02 −0.05 −0.10 −0.10 −0.19 −0.27
Additional weight for long stroke 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.06 0.12 0.21 0.31

CG1
Calculation (Example) CDG1FN20-100Z 앫Basic weight ···········································0.18 kg (Flange, ø 20)
(Built-in magnet, Flange, ø 20, 100 stroke) 앫Additional weight for stroke ····················0.05 kg/50 mm
앫Air cylinder stroke···································100 mm
앫Additional weight for switch magnet ·······0.01 kg
0.18 + 0.05 x (100 / 50) + 0.01 = 0.29 kg

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
Built-in One-touch Fittings (The shape is the same as the existing product.)

Non-rotating Rod
CG1 Mounting style N Bore size F Stroke

Built-in One-touch fittings Specifications

Double Acting, Double Rod

Bore size [mm] 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
This type has the One-touch fittings integrated in a cylinder, which enables

CG1KW
to reduce the piping labor and installing space dramatically. Action Double acting
Fluid Air
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Dimensions (Dimensions other than those shown below are the same as the standard type.) Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Piston speed 50 to 750 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper

Double Acting, Single Rod

Bore size
[mm] GA GB HD HH PD Basic, Axial foot, Rod flange,
øHD

Direct Mount
Head flange, Rod trunnion, Head

CG1R
Pipe O.D. øPD
20 12 12 13 24.2 6 Mounting
trunnion, Clevis (used for
25 12 10 (12) 13 26.7 6 changing the port location by 90°)
yHH

32 12 10 (12) 13 30.2 6 ∗ Auto switch can be mounted.

40 12 10 (12) 16 34.6 8 ∗ Female rod end is not available.
50 13 13 20 40.6 10 ∗ Use the existing seal kit.
63 13 13 20 47.1 10

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Applicable Tubing O.D./I.D.
Note) ( ): Long stroke

CG1KR
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63
Applicable tubing O.D. [mm] 6/4 6/4 6/4 8 / 6 10 / 7.5 10 / 7.5
Can be used for either nylon,
Applicable tubing material
soft nylon or polyurethane tubing.

Clean Series
With End Lock

CBG1

10-CG1 Mounting style Type (Cushion) Bore size Stroke Z

Clean Series (With relief port)

The type which is applicable for using inside the clean room graded Class Specifications
100 by making an actuator’s rod section a double seal construction and Bore size [mm] 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
discharging by relief port directly to the outside of clean room.
Action Double acting
Auto Switch

Fluid Air
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Piston speed 30 to 400 mm/s
Made to Order

Relief port size M5 x 0.8

Basic, Axial foot, Rod flange,
Mounting
Head flange∗∗
∗ Auto switch can be mounted.
∗∗ The basic type is B type only. However, no trunnion mounting female
thread is provided.
8
Series CG1

Air-hydro
CG1 Mounting style H Bore size Stroke Z Pivot bracket Rod end bracket

Air-hydro

Low pressure hydraulic cylinder of 1.0 MPa or less Specifications

When using together with the CC series air-hydro unit, constant and low
speed actuation and intermediate stopping similar to hydraulic units are
Bore size [mm] 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
possible with the use of valves and other pneumatic equipment. Action Double acting
Fluid Turbine oil
Dimensions (Dimensions other than those shown below are the same as the standard type.) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Bore size
[mm] GB TB S ZZ Minimum operating pressure 0.18 MPa
20 12 11 77 114 Piston speed 15 to 300 mm/s
25 12 11 77 119 Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
32 12 11 79 121 Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60 °C
TB
S + Stroke 40 13 12 87 139 Basic, Axial foot, Rod flange, Head
ZZ + Stroke 50 14 13 102 162 flange, Rod trunnion, Head trunnion,
Mounting
63 14 13 102 162 Clevis (used for changing the port
location by 90°)
∗ Auto switch can be mounted.

Water Resistant

CDG1 Mounting style Type Bore size Port thread type R Stroke Z Pivot bracket Rod end bracket H7BAL -XC6
Water resistant 2-colour indication,
With auto switch
solid state auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Water resistant cylinder
H7BAL ø 32 to ø 63
R NBR seals (Nitrile rubber)
G5BAL ø 80, ø 100
V FKM seals (Fluororubber)
Made to Order
Specifications
Caution Bore size [mm] 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100
Since the scraper is press-fit into the rod cover, it cannot be replaced.
Action Double acting, Single rod
Cushion Rubber bumper/Air cushion
Auto switch mounting Band mounting type
Made to Order XC6: Made of stainless steel
Applicable for use in an environment with water splashing
such as food processing and car wash equipment, etc. ∗ Specifications other than above are the same as standard type.

Dimensions (Dimensions other than those shown below are the same as the standard type.)
With rubber bumper With air cushion
WA
ø E−0.05

GA GB
ø E−0.05

GA GB
0
0

(E1)
(E1)

(F1) TA TB (F1) TA TB
S + Stroke F S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
[mm]
Bore ZZ
size
(E1) E∗ (F1) F∗ GA S TA WA Male thread Female thread
32 17 18 2 2 18 77 (85) 17 22 119 (127) 93 (101)
40 21 25 2 2 19 84 (93) 18 23 136 (145) 101 (110)
50 26 30 2 2 21 97 (109) 20 25 157 (169) 115 (127)
63 26 32 2 2 21 97 (109) 20 25 157 (169) 115 (127)
80 32 40 3 3 28 116 (130) — 32 190 (204) 138 (152)
100 37 50 3 3 29 117 (131) — 33 191 (205) 142 (156)
∗ Dimensions marked with “∗” are the same as the standard type.
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

9
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Cylinder with Stable Lubrication Function (Lube-retainer)

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
CDG1 Mounting Z Bore size M Stroke Rod end thread Z Pivot bracket Rod end bracket Auto switch

With auto switch Cylinder with Stable Lubrication Function Specifications

(Built-in magnet) (Lube-retainer)
Bore size [mm] 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100

Double Acting, Double Rod

Action Double acting, Single rod

CG1W
Standard
Minimum operating pressure 0.1 MPa
Cushion Rubber bumper
∗ Specifications other than the above are the same as the
standard type.
Dimensions (Dimensions other than those shown below are the same as the standard type.)

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

∗ No trunnion mounting female thread is provided on the rod side. (For B: Basic) [mm]
Bore size GA P Bore size GA P
GA 2 x P

CG1
20 14 M5 x 0.8 50 (14) (Rc 1/4)
25 13 M5 x 0.8 63 (14) (Rc 1/4)
32 (12) (Rc 1/8) 80 (20) (Rc 3/8)
40 (13) (Rc 1/8) 100 (20) (Rc 1/2)
∗ When female thread is used, use a washer, etc. to prevent the contact

Double Acting, Single Rod

part at the rod end from being deformed depending on the material of
the workpiece.

CG1K
( ): Same as the standard model.
∗ The mounting dimensions of the mounting bracket are the same as the
standard type.

Non-rotating Rod
Precautions

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
Be sure to read this before handling. Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch
Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website,
http://www.smc.eu

Handling

Double Acting, Single Rod

Warning

Direct Mount

CG1R
1. Do not operate the cushion valve in 5. When a cylinder is operated with one end 3. Tighten clevis bracket mounting
the fully closed or fully opened state. fixed and other free (basic, flange types), a bolts with the following proper
Using it in the fully closed state will cause bending moment may act on the cylinder tightening torque.
the cushion seal to be damaged. Using it due to the vibration generated at the stroke ø 20: 1.5 N·m, ø 25 to 32: 2.9 N·m,
in the fully opened state will cause the end, which can damage the cylinder. In ø 40: 4.9 N·m,
piston rod assembly or the cover to be such a case, install a mounting bracket to ø 50: 11.8 N·m, ø 63 to 80: 24.5 N·m,

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

damaged. suppress the vibration of the cylinder body ø 100: 42.2 N·m
2. Do not turn the cushion valve the or reduce the piston speed so that the

CG1KR
number of rotations shown below cylinder does not vibrate. Also, use a
or more from its fully closed state. mounting bracket to suppress vibrations Disassembly/Replacement
If it is turned the number of rotations when moving the cylinder body or when a Caution
shown below or more, the cushion valve cylinder is operated horizontally and fixed
may come off and jump out by the air at one end at a high speed and frequency. 1. Do not replace the bushings.
pressure, causing a hazard. The bushings are press-fit. To replace
6. Do not apply excessive lateral load them, they must be replaced together with
Bore size Hexagon wrench to the piston rod.
With End Lock

Rotations the cover assembly.

CBG1

[mm] nominal size Easy checking method

20 2 1.5 Minimum operating pressure after the 2. To replace a seal, apply grease to
25 3 1.5 cylinder is mounted to the equipment the new seal before installing it.
32 4 1.5 [MPa] = Minimum operating pressure of If the cylinder is put into operation without
cylinder [MPa] + {Load weight [kg] x 9.8 x applying grease to the seal, it could cause
40 5 1.5
Friction coefficient of guide/Sectional area the seal to wear significantly, leading to
50 3 3 of cylinder [mm2]} premature air leakage.
63 4.5 3
Auto Switch

If smooth operation is confirmed within the 3. Cylinders with ø 50 or larger bore

80 5 4 above value, the load on the cylinder is sizes cannot be disassembled.
100 5 4 the resistance of the thrust only and it can
be judged as having no lateral load. When disassembling cylinders with bore
3. O p e r a t e w i t h i n t h e s p e c i f i e d sizes of ø 20 through ø 40, grip the double
cylinder speed and kinetic energy. flat part of either the tube cover or the rod
cover with a vise and loosen the other side
Otherwise, cylinder and seal damage may Caution with a wrench or a monkey wrench etc.,
occur.
Made to Order

1. Do not use the air cylinder as an and then remove the cover. When re-
4. Use caution regarding the cushion air-hydro cylinder. tightening, tighten approximately 2 degrees
performance in the low-speed range. This may result in oil leak. more than the original position. (Cylinders
There may be individual performance and with ø 50 or larger bore sizes are tightened
2. Install a rod boot without twisting. with a large tightening torque and cannot
effect variances when used near 50 mm/
If the cylinder is installed with its bellows be disassembled. If disassembly is
s. Please consult with SMC about usage.
twisted, it could damage the bellows. required, please contact SMC.)
10
Series CG1

Construction
With rubber bumper ø 80, ø 100
y

!0 r @0 t @2 q y w e @1 o u

ø 80, ø 100

!9 @2 !8 r y e u i
u

Long stroke Long stroke

1001 to 1500

With air cushion

!5 !0 r @0 t @2 q !6 w !1 e @1 o !3 !7 !2 @3 !4 !9 @2 !8

Long stroke
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 16 Cushion seal A Urethane ø 32 or larger is
2 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 17 Cushion seal B Urethane common.
3 Piston Aluminium alloy 18 Head cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised
Stainless steel For ø 20 or ø 25 with built-in magnet 19 Cylinder tube Aluminium alloy Hard anodised
4 Piston rod
Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ 20 Rod seal NBR
5 Bushing Bearing alloy 21 Piston seal NBR
6 Bumper Resin ø 32 or larger is 22 Tube gasket NBR
7 Bumper Resin common. 23 Valve seal NBR
8 Retaining ring Stainless steel Except ø 80 and ø 100
9 Wear ring Resin Replacement Parts: Seal Kit
10 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents
11 Cushion ring A Aluminium alloy 20 CG1N20Z-PS
12 Cushion ring B Aluminium alloy 25 CG1N25Z-PS
13 Seal retainer Rolled steel Zinc chromated Set of the nos. @0, @1, @2
32 CG1N32Z-PS
Cushion ø 40 or smaller Carbon steel Electroless nickel plating 40 CG1N40Z-PS
14
valve ø 50 or larger Steel wire Zinc chromated Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on page 10 for
15 Steel ball Carbon steel Disassembly/Replacement. Order with the kit number according to
Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the the bore size.
piston. ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is
stainless steel. needed. Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
11
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Basic: CG1BN

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
Width across flats KA
F GA 2xP GB

.4
(Rc, NPT, G)

R0
2 x TC MM H1

øD
øE −0.05

øE−0.05
øI
øTD

Double Acting, Double Rod

0

CG1W
Standard
.4
Width across flats B1

R0
TE AL
8xJ
TG TF A K TA 4 x TC TB C
NA H S + Stroke F NA
ZZ + Stroke

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

TC thread detail

CG1
With air cushion 2xP
WA (Rc, NPT, G) WB 10° Wθ°
GA Cushion valve, Width across flats WH GB

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
Basic (Without trunnion mounting female thread): CG1ZN

CG1KW
F GA 2xP GB
Width across flats KA
(Rc, NPT, G) .4
R0
MM H1
øD
øE−0.05

øE−0.05
øI
0

Double Acting, Single Rod

0

Direct Mount

CG1R
Width across flats B1
.4
R0

AL
A K
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
[mm]
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
A AL B1 C D E F H H1 I J K KA MM
size Standard Long stroke GA GB P GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 13 14 8 12 2 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7 5 6 M8 x 1.25
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 14 2 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 17 20 12 18 2 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 19 26 16 25 2 50 8 47 M6 x 1 depth 12 6 14 M14 x 1.5
With End Lock

CBG1

50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 32 20 30 2 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16 7 18 M18 x 1.5
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 38 20 32 2 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16 7 18 M18 x 1.5
80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 3/8 17.5 16 (17.5) 3/8 40 37 32 50 25 40 3 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 depth 22 10 22 M22 x 1.5
100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 1/2 17.5 16 (17.5) 1/2 40 37 41 60 30 50 3 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 depth 22 10 26 M26 x 1.5
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] TC Thread [mm]
Bore Bore Rc, NPT, G Bore
NA S TA TB ZZ WA WB W θ WH TC TD TE TF TG
Auto Switch

size size GA GB P size

20 24 69 (77) 11 11 106 (114) 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 M5 x 0.8 8+0.08
0 4 0.5 5.5
25 29 69 (77) 11 11 111 (119) 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 M6 x 0.75 10+0.08
0 5 1 6.5
32 35.5 71 (79) 11 10 (11) 113 (121) 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 M8 x 1.0 12+0.08
0 5.5 1 7.5
40 44 78 (87) 12 10 (12) 130 (139) 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 M10 x 1.25 14+0.08
0 6 1.25 8.5
50 55 90 (102) 13 12 (13) 150 (162) 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 M12 x 1.25 16+0.08
0 7.5 2 10
Made to Order

63 69 90 (102) 13 12 (13) 150 (162) 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 M14 x 1.5 18+0.08
0 11.5 3 14.5
80 86 108 (122) — — 182 (196) 80 20 16 (20) 3/8 24 20 (24) 20° 4 80 — — — — —
100 106 108 (122) — — 182 (196) 100 20 16 (20) 1/2 24 20 (24) 20° 4 100 — — — — —
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke. ∗ Cylinder sizes ø 80 and ø 100 do not have
trunnion mounting female thread on the width
across flats NA.
12
Series CG1

Basic: CG1BN

With rod boot

8 8
8
øIJ

øIJ
øe

øe

JH
l f l f
h+l h+l JW
ZZ + l + Stroke ZZ + l + Stroke

ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100

With Rod Boot [mm]

Bore JH JW
size
e f h IJ (Reference) (Reference)
l ZZ
20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 126 (134)
25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 133 (141)
32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 135 (143)

/4 stroke
40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 150 (159)
50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 170 (182)
63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 170 (182)

1
80 52 10 80 59 — — 191 (205)
100 62 7 80 71 — — 191 (205)
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.

Female rod end

MM
Thread depth A1 Female Rod End [mm]
Bore
size
A1 H MM ZZ
20 8 13 M4 x 0.7 84 (92)
25 8 14 M5 x 0.8 85 (93)
32 12 14 M6 x 1 87 (95)
40 13 15 M8 x 1.25 95 (104)
50 18 16 M10 x 1.5 108 (120)
H 63 18 16 M10 x 1.5 108 (120)
ZZ + Stroke 80 21 19 M14 x 1.5 130 (144)
100 25 22 M16 x 1.5 133 (147)
∗ When female thread is used, use a washer etc.
to prevent the contact part at the rod end from
being deformed depending on the material of
the workpiece.

13
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Axial Foot: CG1LN

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
H S + Stroke
Width across flats KA GA 2xP Width across flats NA GB
8xJ
(Rc, NPT, G)
MM H1

øD

Double Acting, Double Rod

I

C
B

CG1W
Standard
LH
°

LT
Width across flats B1 15

AL W W
2 x øLC C
A K X Y (Knock pin position) Y X M
4 x øLD LX

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Z LS + Stroke LZ
ZZ + Stroke

CG1
With air cushion WA 2xP WB
(Rc, NPT, G) 10° Wθ°
GA GB
Cushion valve, Width across flats WH

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
With rod boot

Double Acting, Double Rod

h+l h+l

CG1KW
8 8 8
øIJ

øIJ
øe

øe

JH

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
l f l f JW
Z+l Z+l
ZZ + l + Stroke ZZ + l + Stroke

ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

[mm]

CG1KR
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
size Standard Long stroke GA GB P
A AL B B1 C D H H1 I J K KA LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ M MM
GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 34 13 14 8 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 5 6 4 6 20 45 (53) 3 32 44 3 M8 x 1.25
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 38.5 17 16.5 10 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 5.5 8 4 6 22 45 (53) 3 36 49 3.5 M10 x 1.25
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 45 17 20 12 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 5.5 10 4 7 25 45 (53) 3 44 58 3.5 M10 x 1.25
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 54.5 19 26 16 50 8 47 M6 x 1 6 14 4 7 30 51 (60) 3 54 71 4 M14 x 1.5
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 70.5 27 32 20 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 7 18 5 10 40 55 (67) 4.5 66 86 5 M18 x 1.5
With End Lock

63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 82.5 27 38 20 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 7 18 5 12 45 55 (67) 4.5 82 106 5 M18 x 1.5
CBG1

80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 3/8 17.5 16 (17.5) 3/8 40 37 101 32 50 25 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 10 22 6 11 55 60 (74) 4.5 100 125 5 M22 x 1.5
100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 1/2 17.5 16 (17.5) 1/2 40 37 121 41 60 30 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 10 26 6 14 65 60 (74) 6 120 150 7 M26 x 1.5
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Bore Bore Rc, NPT, G
h IJ (JH JW l
Bore
NA S W X Y Z ZZ size GA GB
WA WB Wθ WH size e f Z ZZ
size P Reference) (Reference)
20 24 69 (77) 10 15 7 47 110 (118) 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 67 130 (138)
Auto Switch

25 29 69 (77) 10 15 7 52 115.5 (123.5) 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 74 137.5 (145.5)
32 35.5 71 (79) 10 16 8 53 117.5 (125.5) 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 75 139.5 (147.5)
/4 stroke

40 44 78 (87) 10 16.5 8.5 63.5 135 (144) 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 83.5 155 (164)
50 55 90 (102) 17.5 22 11 75.5 157.5 (169.5) 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 95.5 177.5 (189.5)
63 69 90 (102) 17.5 22 13 75.5 157.5 (169.5) 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 95.5 177.5 (189.5)
1

80 86 108 (122) 20 28.5 14 95 188.5 (202.5) 80 20 16 (20) 3/8 24 20 (24) 20° 4 80 52 10 80 59 — — 104 197.5 (211.5)
Made to Order

100 106 108 (122) 20 30 16 95 192 (206) 100 20 16 (20) 1/2 24 20 (24) 20° 4 100 62 7 80 71 — — 104 201 (215)
∗ For female rod end, since the wrench flap (K and KA portions) will be inside of the bracket ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
when the piston rod is retracted at the stroke end, extend the piston rod to tighten the nut
using a tool, and mount a workpiece on the rod end.
∗ Refer to the basic type for the female rod end.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.
14
Series CG1

Rod Flange: CG1FN

Width across flats KA F FT GA 2xP GB 4 x øFD øD 8xJ
(Rc, NPT, G)

.4
MM

R0
H1

øD

FX±0.15
øE−0.05
∗øE−0.05

øI

0
0

C
Width across flats B1

AL Width across flats NA

A K C
H S + Stroke F FX±0.15
ZZ + Stroke B

∗ End boss is machined on the flange for øE.

With air cushion WA 2xP WB
(Rc, NPT, G) 10° Wθ°
GA GB
Cushion valve, Width across flats WH

With rod boot 8 8 8

øIJ

øIJ
øe

øe

JH
l f
l f
h+l JW
h+l
ZZ + l + Stroke
ZZ + l + Stroke
ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100
[mm]
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
size Standard Long stroke
A AL B B1 C D E F FD FT FX H H1 I J K
GA GB P GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 40 13 14 8 12 2 5.5 6 28 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 5
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 44 17 16.5 10 14 2 5.5 7 32 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 5.5
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 53 17 20 12 18 2 6.6 7 38 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 5.5
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 61 19 26 16 25 2 6.6 8 46 50 8 47 M6 x 1 6
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 76 27 32 20 30 2 9 9 58 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 7
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 92 27 38 20 32 2 11 9 70 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 7
80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 3/8 17.5 16 (17.5) 3/8 40 37 104 32 50 25 40 3 11 11 82 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 10
100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 1/2 17.5 16 (17.5) 1/2 40 37 128 41 60 30 50 3 14 14 100 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 10
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Bore Bore Rc, NPT, G Bore JH JW
KA MM NA S ZZ size GA GB
WA WB Wθ WH e f h IJ (Reference) (Reference) l ZZ
size P size
20 6 M8 x 1.25 24 69 (77) 106 (114) 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 126 (134)
25 8 M10 x 1.25 29 69 (77) 111 (119) 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 133 (141)
32 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 71 (79) 113 (121) 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 135 (143)
/4 stroke

40 14 M14 x 1.5 44 78 (87) 130 (139) 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 150 (159)
50 18 M18 x 1.5 55 90 (102) 150 (162) 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 170 (182)
63 18 M18 x 1.5 69 90 (102) 150 (162) 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 170 (182)
1

80 22 M22 x 1.5 86 108 (122) 182 (196) 80 20 16 (20) 3/8 24 20 (24) 20° 4 80 52 10 80 59 — — 191 (205)
100 26 M26 x 1.5 106 108 (122) 182 (196) 100 20 16 (20) 1/2 24 20 (24) 20° 4 100 62 7 80 71 — — 191 (205)
∗ For female rod end, since the wrench flap (K and KA portions) will be inside of the bracket ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
when the piston rod is retracted at the stroke end, extend the piston rod to tighten the nut
using a tool, and mount a workpiece on the rod end.
∗ Refer to the basic type for the female rod end.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.
15
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Head Flange: CG1GN

CG1
4 x øFD 8xJ Width across flats KA F GA 2xP GB
(Rc, NPT, G)

∗øE−0.05
MM

0
H1

øD

Double Acting, Double Rod

FX±0.15

øE−0.05

øI
0
B

CG1W
Standard
.4
Width across flats B1

R0
AL Width across flats NA
C A K

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

FX±0.15 H S + Stroke FT F
B ZZ + Stroke

CG1
∗ End boss is machined on the flange for øE.

With air cushion 2xP

WA (Rc, NPT, G) WB
Wθ° 10° GA GB
Cushion valve, Width across flats WH

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
With rod boot
8 8 8

Double Acting, Single Rod

øIJ
øIJ

øe
øe

Direct Mount

CG1R
JH
l f l f JW
h+l h+l
ZZ + l + Stroke ZZ + l + Stroke

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100

CG1KR
[mm]
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
A AL B B1 C D E F FD FT FX H H1 I J K
size Standard Long stroke GA GB P GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 40 13 14 8 12 2 5.5 6 28 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 5
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 44 17 16.5 10 14 2 5.5 7 32 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 5.5
With End Lock

32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 53 17 20 12 18 2 6.6 7 38 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 5.5
CBG1

40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 61 19 26 16 25 2 6.6 8 46 50 8 47 M6 x 1 6

50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 76 27 32 20 30 2 9 9 58 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 7
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 92 27 38 20 32 2 11 9 70 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 7
80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 3/8 17.5 16 (17.5) 3/8 40 37 104 32 50 25 40 3 11 11 82 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 10
100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 1/2 17.5 16 (17.5) 1/2 40 37 128 41 60 30 50 3 14 14 100 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 10
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Auto Switch

Bore Bore Rc, NPT, G Bore JH JW

KA MM NA S ZZ size GA GB
WA WB Wθ WH e f h IJ (Reference) (Reference) l ZZ
size P size
20 6 M8 x 1.25 24 69 (77) 112 (120) 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 132 (140)
25 8 M10 x 1.25 29 69 (77) 118 (126) 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 140 (148)
32 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 71 (79) 120 (128) 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 142 (150)
/4 stroke

40 14 M14 x 1.5 44 78 (87) 138 (147) 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 158 (167)
Made to Order

50 18 M18 x 1.5 55 90 (102) 159 (171) 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 179 (191)
63 18 M18 x 1.5 69 90 (102) 159 (171) 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 179 (191)
1

80 22 M22 x 1.5 86 108 (122) 193 (207) 80 20 16 (20) 3/8 24 20 (24) 20° 4 80 52 10 80 59 — — 202 (216)
100 26 M26 x 1.5 106 108 (122) 196 (210) 100 20 16 (20) 1/2 24 20 (24) 20° 4 100 62 7 80 71 — — 205 (219)
∗ Refer to the basic type for the female rod end. ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.
16
Series CG1

Rod Trunnion: CG1UN

H S + Stroke F
A K GA 2xP Width across flats NA GB TR
(Rc, NPT, G)

2 x øTDe8
.4
MM AL F TA

R0

(Pin O.D)
H1 ∗

øD

øE−0.05
øE−0.05

øI

0
0

.4

Width across
R0

flats B1 Width across

flats KA Z TZ
ZZ + Stroke

∗ Constructed of a trunnion pin, flat washer and hexagon socket head cap bolt.

With air cushion 2xP

WA (Rc, NPT, G) WB
10° Wθ°
GA Cushion valve, Width across flats WH GB

With rod boot

h+l
l f
øIJ
øe

JH

8 8 JW
Z+l
ZZ + l + Stroke

[mm]
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
size Standard
A AL B1 D E F H H1 I K KA MM NA S
Long stroke GA GB P GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 13 8 12 2 35 5 26 5 6 M8 x 1.25 24 69 (77)
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 17 10 14 2 40 6 31 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 29 69 (77)
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 17 12 18 2 40 6 38 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 71 (79)
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 19 16 25 2 50 8 47 6 14 M14 x 1.5 44 78 (87)
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 20 30 2 58 11 58 7 18 M18 x 1.5 55 90 (102)
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 20 32 2 58 11 72 7 18 M18 x 1.5 69 90 (102)
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Bore Bore Rc, NPT, G Bore JH JW l
TA TDe8 TR TZ Z ZZ size GA
WA WB Wθ WH e f h IJ (Reference) (Reference)
Z ZZ
size GB P size
−0.025
20 11 8−0.047 39 47.6 46 106 (114) 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 66 126 (134)
−0.025
25 11 10−0.047 43 53 51 111 (119) 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 73 133 (141)
/4 stroke

−0.032
32 11 12−0.059 54.5 67.7 51 113 (121) 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 73 135 (143)
−0.032
40 12 14−0.059 65.5 78.7 62 130 (139) 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 82 150 (159)
−0.032
50 13 16 80 98.6 71 150 (162) 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 91 170 (182)
1

−0.059
−0.032
63 13 18−0.059 98 119.2 71 150 (162) 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 91 170 (182)
∗ Refer to the basic type for the female rod end. ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

17
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Head Trunnion: CG1TN

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
H S + Stroke F
TR A K GA 2xP GB
(Rc, NPT, G)

.4
∗
2 x øTDe8

MM AL F

R0
(Pin O.D)

H1

øD

Double Acting, Double Rod

øE−0.05

øE−0.05
øI

CG1W
Standard
0

0
.4
Width across flats B1

R0
Width across flats KA Width across flats NA
TZ Z + Stroke TB

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

ZZ + Stroke

CG1
∗ Constructed of a trunnion pin, flat washer and hexagon socket head cap bolt.

With air cushion 2xP

WA (Rc, NPT, G) WB
Wθ° 10°

Double Acting, Single Rod

GA Cushion valve, Width across flats WH GB

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
h+l
With rod boot l f

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
øIJ
øe

JH

8 8 JW
Z + l + Stroke

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

ZZ + l + Stroke

[mm] CG1KR
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
size Standard
A AL B1 D E F H H1 I K KA MM NA S
Long stroke GA GB P GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 13 8 12 2 35 5 26 5 6 M8 x 1.25 24 69 (77)
With End Lock

CBG1

25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 17 10 14 2 40 6 31 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 29 69 (77)
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 17 12 18 2 40 6 38 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 71 (79)
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 19 16 25 2 50 8 47 6 14 M14 x 1.5 44 78 (87)
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 20 30 2 58 11 58 7 18 M18 x 1.5 55 90 (102)
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 20 32 2 58 11 72 7 18 M18 x 1.5 69 90 (102)
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Auto Switch

Bore Bore Rc, NPT, G

h IJ (RefJH JW l
Bore
TB TDe8 TR TZ Z ZZ size GA
WA WB Wθ WH size e f erence) (Reference)
Z ZZ
size GB P
−0.025
20 11 8
−0.047 39 47.6 93 (101) 106 (114) 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 113 (121) 126 (134)
−0.025
25 11 10 43 53 98 (106) 111 (119) 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 120 (128) 133 (141)
/4 stroke

−0.047
−0.032
32 10 (11) 12
−0.059 54.5 67.7 101 (108) 113 (121) 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 123 (130) 135 (143)
−0.032
40 10 (12) 14
−0.059 65.5 78.7 118 (125) 130 (139) 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 138 (145) 150 (159)
−0.032
50 12 (13) 16 80 98.6 136 (147) 150 (162) 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 156 (167) 170 (182)
1

Made to Order

−0.059
−0.032
63 12 (13) 18
−0.059 98 119.2 136 (147) 150 (162) 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 156 (167) 170 (182)
∗ Refer to the basic type for the female rod end. ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

18
Series CG1

Clevis: CG1DN (ø 20 to ø 63)

CZ H S + Stroke L RR
C TT A K GA 2xP GB
MM AL F (Rc, NPT, G)
H1

øD
øE−0.05

øI
0
C

.4
Width across

R0
8xJ flats B1 Width across Width across flats NA
TZ flats KA Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

øCDH10 (Hole dia.)

d9 (Shaft dia.)
With air cushion
2xP
WA (Rc, NPT, G) WB
Wθ° 10° GA GB
Cushion valve, Width across flats WH

With rod boot h+l

8 8
øIJ
øe

JH

l f JW
Z + l + Stroke
ZZ + l + Stroke

[mm]
Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
Bore size A AL B1 C CD CZ D E F H H1 I J K KA L MM NA
Standard Long stroke GA GB P GA GB P
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 18 15.5 13 14 8 29 8 12 2 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 5 6 14 M8 x 1.25 24
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 33 10 14 2 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 5.5 8 16 M10 x 1.25 29
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 12 10 (12) 1/8 10.5 10 (10.5) 1/8 22 19.5 17 20 12 40 12 18 2 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 5.5 10 20 M10 x 1.25 35.5
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 13 10 (13) 1/8 13 10 (10) 1/8 30 27 19 26 14 49 16 25 2 50 8 47 M6 x 1 6 14 22 M14 x 1.5 44
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 32 16 60 20 30 2 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 7 18 25 M18 x 1.5 55
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 14 12 (14) 1/4 14 12 (14) 1/4 35 32 27 38 18 74 20 32 2 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 7 18 30 M18 x 1.5 69
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Bore Applicable Bore Rc, NPT, G
h IJ (RefJH JW l
Bore
size
RR S TT TZ Z ZZ pin part no. WA WB Wθ WH size e f Z ZZ
size GA GB P erence) (Reference)
20 11 69 (77) 3.2 43.4 118 (126) 129 (137) CD-G02 20 12 10 (12) M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25° 1.5 20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 138 (146) 149 (157)
25 13 69 (77) 3.2 48 125 (133) 138 (146) CD-G25 25 12.5 10 (12.5) M5 x 0.8 16 14.5 (16) 25° 1.5 25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 147 (155) 160 (168)
/4 stroke

32 15 71 (79) 4.5 59.4 131 (139) 146 (154) CD-G03 32 12 10 (12) 1/8 16 14 (16) 25° 1.5 32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 153 (161) 168 (176)
40 18 78 (87) 4.5 71.4 150 (159) 168 (177) CD-G04 40 13 10 (13) 1/8 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5 40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 170 (179) 188 (197)
50 20 90 (102) 6 86 173 (185) 193 (205) CD-G05 50 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 16 (18) 20° 3 50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 193 (205) 213 (225)
1

63 22 90 (102) 8 105.4 178 (190) 200 (212) CD-G06 63 14 12 (14) 1/4 18 17 (18) 20° 3 63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 198 (210) 220 (232)
∗ A clevis pin, retaining rings and mounting bolts are included. Refer to the basic type for the female rod end. ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

19
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CG1

Clevis: CG1DN (ø 80, ø 100)

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
TZ H S + Stroke L RR
CZ F GA 2xP GB V
C A K (Rc, NPT, G)
AL

Double Acting, Double Rod

MM H1

CG1W
Standard
øD
øE−0.05

øI
0
C

.4
R0

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

+0.5
8xJ CX +0.3 Width across flats KA Width across flats NA

CG1
Width across flats B1
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
øCDH10 (Hole dia.)

Double Acting, Single Rod

d9 (Shaft dia.)

With air cushion

CG1K
2xP
(Rc, NPT, G)
Wθ° 10° WA Cushion valve, Width across flats WH WB

Non-rotating Rod
GA GB

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
Double Acting, Single Rod
Direct Mount

CG1R
With rod boot
h+l
8

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
øIJ
øe

l f
Z + l + Stroke
ZZ + l + Stroke
With End Lock

CBG1

[mm]
Bore Stroke range Rc, NPT port G port
Auto Switch

size Standard Long stroke GA GB

A AL B1 C CD CX CZ D E F H H1 I J K KA L MM NA
P GA GB P
80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 3/8 17.5 16 (17.5) 3/8 40 37 32 50 18 28 56 25 40 3 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 10 22 35 M22 x 1.5 86
100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 20 16 (20) 1/2 17.5 16 (17.5) 1/2 40 37 41 60 22 32 64 30 50 3 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 10 26 43 M26 x 1.5 106
[mm] With Air Cushion [mm] With Rod Boot [mm]
Bore Applicable Bore Rc, NPT, G Bore
RR S TZ V Z ZZ pin part no. WA WB Wθ WH e f h IJ l Z ZZ
size size GA GB P size
Made to Order

80 18 108 (122) 64 26 214 (228) 232 (246) IY-G08 80 20 16 (20) 3/8 24 20 (24) 20° 4 80 52 10 80 59 1 223 (237) 241 (255)
/4
100 22 108 (122) 72 32 222 (236) 244 (258) IY-G10 100 20 16 (20) 1/2 24 20 (24) 20° 4 100 62 7 80 71 stroke 231 (245) 253 (267)
∗ Refer to the basic type for the female rod end. ∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

20
Series CG1

With Pivot Bracket [( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.]

Rod Trunnion (U) with Pivot Bracket
TS Bracket mounting range

B
TH
TT
TY 4 x øTF
TX +0.10
TW TV øTE 0
Z
Male Thread [mm] Female Thread [mm]
Bore size B TE TF TH TS TT TV TW TX TY Z Bore size Z
20 38 10 5.5 25 28 3.2 35.8 42 16 28 46 20 24
25 45.5 10 5.5 30 33 3.2 39.8 42 20 28 51 25 25
32 54 10 6.6 35 40 4.5 49.4 48 22 28 51 32 25
40 63.5 10 6.6 40 49 4.5 58.4 56 30 30 62 40 27
50 79 20 9 50 60 6 72.4 64 36 36 71 50 29
63 96 20 11 60 74 8 90.4 74 46 46 71 63 29

Head Trunnion (T) TS Bracket mounting range

with Pivot Bracket
B
TH
TT

TX 4 x øTF TY
øTE
+0.10 TW
TV 0
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Male Thread [mm] Female Thread [mm]
Bore size B TE TF TH TS TT TV TW TX TY Z ZZ Bore size Z ZZ
20 38 10 5.5 25 28 3.2 35.8 42 16 28 93 (101) 114 (122) 20 71 ( 79) 92 (100)
25 45.5 10 5.5 30 33 3.2 39.8 42 20 28 98 (106) 119 (127) 25 72 ( 80) 93 (101)
32 54 10 6.6 35 40 4.5 49.4 48 22 28 101 (108) 125 (132) 32 75 ( 82) 99 (106)
40 63.5 10 6.6 40 49 4.5 58.4 56 30 30 118 (125) 146 (153) 40 83 ( 90) 111 (118)
50 79 20 9 50 60 6 72.4 64 36 36 136 (147) 168 (179) 50 94 (105) 126 (137)
63 96 20 11 60 74 8 90.4 74 46 46 136 (147) 173 (184) 63 94 (105) 131 (142)

Clevis (D) with Pivot Bracket

ø 20 to ø 63
B
TH
TT

TX 4 x øTF TY
+0.10
TV øTE 0 TW
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Male Thread [mm] Female Thread [mm]
Bore size B TE TF TH TT TV TW TX TY Z ZZ Bore size Z ZZ
20 38 10 5.5 25 3.2 35.8 42 16 28 118 (126) 139 (147) 20 96 (104) 117 (125)
25 45.5 10 5.5 30 3.2 39.8 42 20 28 125 (133) 146 (154) 25 99 (107) 120 (128)
32 54 10 6.6 35 4.5 49.4 48 22 28 131 (139) 155 (163) 32 105 (113) 129 (137)
40 63.5 10 6.6 40 4.5 58.4 56 30 30 150 (159) 178 (187) 40 115 (124) 143 (152)
50 79 20 9 50 6 72.4 64 36 36 173 (185) 205 (217) 50 131 (143) 163 (175)
63 96 20 11 60 8 90.4 74 46 46 178 (190) 215 (227) 63 136 (148) 173 (185)

Clevis (D) with Pivot Bracket

ø 80, ø 100 4 x øTF
B

TT
TH

TX TY
TV TW
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Male Thread [mm] Female Thread [mm]

Bore size B TF TH TT TV TW TX TY Z ZZ Bore size Z ZZ
80 99.5 11 55 11 110 72 85 45 214 (228) 272.5 (286.5) 80 162 (176) 220.5 (234.5)
100 120 13.5 65 12 130 93 100 60 222 (236) 298.5 (312.5) 100 173 (187) 249.5 (263.5)
21
 Series CG1
Dimensions of Accessories

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
Single Knuckle Joint Double Knuckle Joint
I-G02, G03 I-G04, G05, G08, G10 Y-G02, G03 Y-G04, G05, G08, G10
Material: Carbon steel Material: Cast iron Material: Carbon steel Material: Cast iron
ø ø
øND holeH10

Double Acting, Double Rod

MM
MM øND holeH10 Axis d9

CG1W
Axis d9

Standard
NX
NZ
E1
NZ
E1

L
L
NX
A1 U1
[mm] A1 U1
L1
Applicable bore L1
Part no. A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 NDH10 NX A

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

size [mm] A
I-G02 20 34 8.5 첸16 25 M8 x 1.25 10.3 11.5 8 +0.058
0 8−0.2
−0.4 R1
R1

CG1
I-G03 25, 32 41 10.5 첸20 30 M10 x 1.25 12.8 14 10 +0.058
0 10−0.2
−0.4
+0.058
I-G04 40 42 14 ø 22 30 M14 x 1.5 12 14 10 0 18−0.3
−0.5
+0.070
I-G05 50, 63 56 18 ø 28 40 M18 x 1.5 16 20 14 0 22−0.3
−0.5 [mm]
+0.070
I-G08 80 71 21 ø 38 50 M22 x 1.5 21 27 18 0 28−0.3
−0.5 Part Applicable Included
I-G10 100 79 21 ø 44 55 M26 x 1.5 24 31 22 +0.084
32−0.3 no.
bore size
[mm]
A A1 E1 L1 MM R1 U1 ND NX NZ L pin part no.
0 −0.5

20 34 8.5 첸16 25 M8 x 1.25 10.3 11.5 8

Double Acting, Single Rod

Y-G02 8+0.4
+0.2 16 21 IY-G02
Knuckle Pin Y-G03 25, 32 41 10.5 첸20 30 M10 x 1.25 12.8 14 10 10+0.4
+0.2 20 25.6 IY-G03

CG1K
Y-G04 40 42 16 ø 22 30 M14 x 1.5 12 14 10 18+0.5
+0.3 36 41.6 IY-G04
Y-G05 50, 63 56 20 ø 28 40 M18 x 1.5 16 20 14 22+0.5
+0.3 44 50.6 IY-G05
ø
ø

Y-G08 80 71 23 ø 38 50 M22 x 1.5 21 27 18 28+0.5 56 64 IY-G08

Non-rotating Rod
+0.3
L2
Y-G10 100 79 24 ø 44 55 M26 x 1.5 24 31 22 32+0.5
+0.3 64 72 IY-G10
L1
∗ A knuckle pin and retaining rings are included.
Material: Carbon steel [mm]

Double Acting, Double Rod

Applicable bore Included
Part no. Dd9 L1 d L2 m t Pivot Bracket

CG1KW
size [mm] retaining ring
IY-G02 20 8−0.040
−0.076 21 7.6 16.2 1.5 0.9 Type C8 for axis
IY-G03 25, 32 10−0.040
−0.076 25.6 9.6 20.2 1.55 1.15 Type C10 for axis
ø
ø 20 to ø 63 ø
IY-G04 40 10−0.040
−0.076 41.6 9.6 36.2 1.55 1.15 Type C10 for axis Material: Carbon steel
ø
IY-G05 50, 63 14−0.050
−0.093 50.6 13.4 44.2 2.05 1.15 Type C14 for axis
IY-G08 80 18−0.050
−0.093 64 17 56.2 2.55 1.35 Type C18 for axis
IY-G10 100 22−0.065 72 21 64.2 2.55 1.35 Type C22 for axis

Double Acting, Single Rod

−0.117 .
ø
∗ Retaining rings are included.

Direct Mount
Knock pin hole

CG1R
Clevis Pin xø
ø
ø

L2 ø ø 80, ø 100 ø ø

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

L1 Material: Cast iron
Material: Carbon steel [mm]

CG1KR
Applicable bore Included
Part no.
size [mm] Dd9 L1 d L2 m t retaining ring
CD-G02 20 8−0.040
−0.076 43.4 7.6 38.6 1.5 0.9 Type C8 for axis
CD-G25 25 10−0.040
−0.076 48 9.6 42.6 1.55 1.15 Type C10 for axis
xø
CD-G03 32 12−0.050
−0.093 59.4 11.5 54 1.55 1.15 Type C12 for axis
CD-G04 40 14−0.050
−0.093 71.4 13.4 65 2.05 1.15 Type C14 for axis
CD-G05 50 16−0.050 86 15.2 79.6 2.05 1.15 Type C16 for axis
With End Lock

−0.093
[mm]
CD-G06 18−0.050
CBG1

63 −0.093 105.4 17 97.8 2.45 1.35 Type C18 for axis

Part no. Applicable bore size [mm] TB Td TE TF TH TN TR TT
∗ Retaining rings are included.
CG-020-24A 20 36 8 10 5.5 25 (29.3) 13 3.2
∗ A clevis pin and a knuckle pin are common for the bore size ø 80 and ø 100.
CG-025-24A 25 43 10 10 5.5 30 (33.1) 15 3.2
Rod End Nut CG-032-24A 32 50 12 10 6.6 35 (40.4) 17 4.5
CG-040-24A 40 58 14 10 6.6 40 (49.2) 21 4.5
CG-050-24A 50 70 16 20 9 50 (60.4) 24 6
Auto Switch

CG-063-24A 63 82 18 20 11 60 (74.6) 26 8
CG-080-24A 80 73 18 — 11 55 28–0.1
–0.3 36 11
ø

CG-100-24A 100 90 22 — 13.5 65 32–0.1

–0.3 50 12
Part no. Applicable bore size [mm] TU TV TW TX TY TZ Applicable pin O.D.
Material: Carbon steel [mm] CG-020-24A 20 (18.1) (35.8) 42 16 28 38.3 8d9−0.040
−0.076

Part no. Applicable bore size [mm] d H1 B1 C D CG-025-24A 25 (20.7) (39.8) 42 20 28 42.1 10d9−0.040
−0.076
Made to Order

NT-02 20 M8 x 1.25 5 13 (15) 12.5 CG-032-24A 32 (23.6) (49.4) 48 22 28 53.8 12d9−0.050

−0.093

NT-03 25, 32 M10 x 1.25 6 17 (19.6) 16.5 CG-040-24A 40 (27.3) (58.4) 56 30 30 64.6 14d9−0.050
−0.093

NT-G04 40 M14 x 1.5 8 19 (21.9) 18 CG-050-24A 50 (29.7) (72.4) 64 36 36 79.2 16d9−0.050

−0.093

NT-05 50, 63 M18 x 1.5 11 27 (31.2) 26 CG-063-24A 63 (34.3) (90.4) 74 46 46 97.2 18d9−0.050
−0.093

NT-08 80 M22 x 1.5 13 32 (37.0) 31 CG-080-24A 80 — — 72 85 45 110 18d9−0.050

−0.093

NT-10 100 M26 x 1.5 16 41 (47.3) 39 CG-100-24A 100 — — 93 100 60 130 22d9−0.065
−0.117

22
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod

Series CG1W
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63, ø 80, ø 100
How to Order

CG1W L N 25 100 Z
With auto switch CDG1W L N 25 100 Z M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet)
Number of
Double acting, Auto switch auto switches
Double rod type — Without auto switch
— 2 pcs.
Mounting Type ∗ For applicable auto switches,
B Basic N Rubber bumper refer to the table below.
S 1 pc.
Z∗ Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread) A Air cushion n “n” pcs.
L Axial foot Suffix for cylinder (Rod boot)
Note) In the case of w/rod boot,
F Flange Bore size — Without rod boot
and a foot bracket or rod
U∗ Trunnion One J Nylon tarpaulin flange as a bracket, those
∗ Not available for ø 80 and ø 100.
20 20 mm 50 50 mm side K Heat resistant tarpaulin parts are to be assembled
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the 25 25 mm 63 63 mm Both JJ Nylon tarpaulin at the time of shipment.
product, but not assembled. 32 32 mm 80 80 mm sides KK Heat resistant tarpaulin ∗ For female rod end, no rod
∗ The cylinder for F, L mounting types is Z: Basic 40 40 mm 100 100 mm boot is provided.
(without trunnion mounting female thread). Rod end thread
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model — Male rod end
F Female rod end
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required,
there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch. Cylinder stroke [mm] Made to Order
Refer to “Standard Strokes” on page 24. For details, refer to page 24.
(Example) CDG1WFA32-100Z
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for further information on auto switches.
Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired

Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100 connector
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line In-line
3-wire M9NV M9N —     — 
(NPN)
5 V, 12 V
— — G59  —   —  IC
Grommet
3-wire M9PV M9P —     —  circuit
––––– (PNP) — — G5P  —   — 
M9BV M9B —     — 
Solid state auto switch

2-wire 12 V — — K59  —   —  —
Connector — H7C —  —    —
3-wire M9NWV M9NW —     — 
(NPN) — — G59W  —   —  IC Relay,
Diagnostic Yes 24 V 5 V, 12 V —
indication
3-wire M9PWV M9PW —     —  circuit PLC
(2-colour indication)
(PNP) — — G5PW  —   — 
M9BWV M9BW —     — 
2-wire 12 V —
Grommet — — K59W  —   — 
3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗ —     —  IC
5 V, 12 V
Water resistant 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗ —     —  circuit
(2-colour indication) M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗ —     — 
2-wire 12 V —
— — G5BA∗∗ — —   — 
Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF —  —   —  IC circuit
3-wire (Equiv. to NPN) — 5V — A96V A96 —  —  — — — IC circuit —
Reed auto switch

Yes
100 V A93V A93 —  —   — — —
No Grommet 100 V or less A90V A90 —  —  — — — IC circuit
––––– Yes — B54 100 V, 200 V  —   — —
12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V — B64 200 V or less —  —  — — —
PLC
Connector
Yes — — C73C —  —    —
No 24 V or less — C80C — IC circuit  —    —
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W —  —  — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None··············· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
23
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CG1W

Double Acting, Single Rod

Specifications

CG1
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Action Double acting, Double rod
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa

Double Acting, Double Rod

Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa

CG1W
Standard
Minimum operating pressure 0.08 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: −10 °C to 70 °C
(No freezing)
temperature With auto switch : −10 °C to 60 °C
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 50 to 700 mm/s
+1.4 +1.8
Stroke length tolerance Up to 1000 st 0 mm, Up to 1500 st 0 mm

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Symbol
Basic, Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread),
Mounting∗∗

CG1
Rubber bumper Axial foot, Flange, Trunnion
Male
0.28 0.41 0.66 1.20 2.00 3.40 5.90 9.90
Rubber rod end
bumper Female
Allowable 0.11 0.18 0.29 0.52 0.91 1.54 2.71 4.54
rod end

Double Acting, Single Rod

kinetic
energy Male R: 0.35 R: 0.56
0.91 1.80 3.40 4.90 11.80 16.70

CG1K
Air cushion (J) rod end H: 0.42 H: 0.65
Air
cushion Female
0.11 0.18 0.29 0.52 0.91 1.54 2.71 4.54

Non-rotating Rod
rod end
∗ R: Rod side, H: Head side
∗∗ Rod trunnion type is not available for ø 80 and ø 100.

Double Acting, Double Rod

Foot and flange types of cylinder sizes from ø 20 to ø 63 do not have trunnion mounting female

CG1KW
thread. Operate the cylinder within the allowable kinetic energy.

Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.)
Symbol Specifications
Accessories
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape

Double Acting, Single Rod

-XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (−10 to 150 °C)∗1 Mounting Basic Axial foot Rod flange Rod trunnion

Direct Mount
Cold resistant cylinder (−40 to 70 °C)∗2

CG1R
-XB7 Standard Rod end nut    
-XC6 Made of stainless steel Single knuckle joint    
-XC13 Auto switch rail mounting
Double knuckle joint∗∗
-XC22 Fluororubber seal∗1    
Option (with pin)
-XC37 Larger throttle diameter of connection port
Pivot bracket∗ — — — ∗

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

-XC85 Grease for food processing equipment
Rod boot    
∗1 Cylinders with rubber bumper have no bumper.

CG1KR
∗2 Only compatible with cylinders with rubber ∗ Not available for ø 80 and ø 100.
bumper, but has no bumper. ∗∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are shipped together.

Rod Boot Material Standard Strokes

With End Lock

Maximum operating Bore size [mm] Standard stroke [mm] Note1) Maximum manufacturable stroke [mm] Note 2)
CBG1

Symbol Rod boot material

temperature
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 201 to 1500
J Nylon tarpaulin 70 °C
25
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110 °C∗
32
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot
itself. 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125,
301 to 1500
150, 200, 250, 300
Auto Switch

50, 63
80
Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with
100
auto switches.
Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order. Manufacture of
• Auto switch proper mounting position intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting Note 2) The maximum manufacturable stroke shows the long stroke.
Made to Order

height Note 3) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to “Air
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the products that exceed the standard stroke
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no. might not be able to fulfill the specifications due to the deflection etc.
• Operating range
• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/
Auto switch mounting surfaces
24
Series CG1W

Weights
(kg)
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Basic 0.13 0.22 0.33 0.55 1.02 1.37 2.64 4.09
Basic weight

Axial foot 0.24 0.35 0.49 0.77 1.50 2.09 3.60 5.84
Flange 0.21 0.32 0.47 0.75 1.36 1.87 3.35 5.44
Trunnion 0.14 0.24 0.36 0.60 1.16 1.51 — —
Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25 0.44 0.80 — —
Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22 0.39 0.57
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26 0.64 1.31
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.07 0.10 0.13 0.23 0.34 0.38 0.54 0.77
Additional weight with air cushion 0 0.01 0.04 0 0.01 0.04 0 0.04
Weight reduction for female rod end −0.02 −0.04 −0.04 −0.10 −0.20 –0.20 −0.38 −0.54
Calculation (Example) CG1WLN32-100Z OBasic weight·················· 0.49 (Foot, ø 32)
(Foot, ø 32, 100 stroke) OAdditional weight··········· 0.13/50 stroke
OAir cylinder stroke·········· 100 stroke
0.49 x 0.13 x 100/50 = 0.75 kg

Mounting Brackets/Part No.

Mounting Order Bore size [mm]

Contents
bracket q’ty. 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
2 foots,
Axial foot 2 Note) CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040 CG-L050 CG-L063 CG-L080 CG-L100
8 mounting bolts
1 flange,
Flange 1 CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040 CG-F050 CG-F063 CG-F080 CG-F100
4 mounting bolts
2 trunnion pins, 2 trunnion bolts,
Trunnion pin 1 CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040 CG-T050 CG-T063 — —
2 flat washers

Pivot bracket 1 CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A CG-050-24A CG-063-24A — — 1 pivot bracket

Note) Order two foots per cylinder.

Air-hydro
CDG1W Mounting type H Bore size Stroke Rod end thread Z Auto switch

Air-hydro
— Without magnet
D Built-in magnet
Specifications
Low pressure hydraulic cylinder of 1.0 MPa or less Bore size (mm) 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
When using together with the CC series air-hydro unit, constant and low Action Double acting, Single rod
speed actuation and intermediate stopping similar to hydraulic units are Fluid Turbine oil
possible with the use of valves and other pneumatic equipment. Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Dimensions: Same as the standard type Minimum operating pressure 0.18 MPa
Piston speed 15 to 300 mm/s
Cushion Rubber bumper (Standard equipment)
Ambient and fluid temperatures 5 to 60°C
Basic, Axial foot,
Mounting
Flange, Trunnion
* Auto switch can be mounted.

25
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CG1W

Construction

Double Acting, Single Rod

With rubber bumper

CG1
ø 80, ø 100
y

i r !2 t !4 q w y !3 eu

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
CG1
With air cushion

Double Acting, Single Rod

i r !2 t !4 q !1 w o !3 e !5 !0

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
Double Acting, Single Rod
Direct Mount

CG1R
Component Parts Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

No. Description Material Note Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents

CG1KR
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 20 CG1WN20Z-PS
Set of the
2 Cylinder tube Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 25 CG1WN25Z-PS
nos.
3 Piston Aluminium alloy 32 CG1WN32Z-PS
!2, !3, !4
Stainless steel For ø 20 or ø 25 with built-in magnet 40 CG1WN40Z-PS
4 Piston rod
Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on
5 Bushing Bearing alloy page 10 for Disassembly/Replacement.
6 Bumper Resin Order with the kit number according to the
ø 32 or larger is common.
With End Lock

7 Bumper Resin bore size.

CBG1

8 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
9 Cushion ring Aluminium alloy Order with the following part number when only
the grease pack is needed.
ø 40 or smaller Carbon steel Electroless nickel plating
10 Cushion valve Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
ø 50 or larger Steel wire Zinc chromated
11 Cushion seal Urethane
12 Rod seal NBR
Auto Switch

13 Piston seal NBR

14 Tube gasket NBR
15 Valve seal NBR
Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston.
∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of stainless steel.
Made to Order

26
Series CG1W

Basic with Rubber Bumper: CG1WBN

Width across flats KA F GA 2 x RcP GA F Width across flats KA

MM
MM H1
øD
H1

øD
øI

øE−0.05
øE−0.05

0
0

C
.4

R0
R0

Width across flats B1

.4
AL AL Width across flats B1
A K TA 4 x TC TA K A C
8xJ
H S + Stroke H + Stroke NA
ZZ + 2 Stroke

<With rod boot on one side> Female rod end

MM
8 8 Thread depth A1
øIJ
øe

l f H
h+l ZZ + 2 Stroke
ZZ + l + Stroke

<With rod boot on both sides>

8 8 8 8
øIJ
øe

JH
l f f l + Stroke
JW
h+l S + Stroke h + l + Stroke
ZZ + 2 ( l + Stroke)

[mm]
Bore Stroke range
size
A AL B1 C D E F GA H1 I J K KA MM NA P S
Standard Long stroke
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 18 15.5 13 14 8 12 2 12 5 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7 5 6 M8 x 1.25 24 1/8 77
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 14 2 12 6 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 29 1/8 77
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 22 19.5 17 20 12 18 2 12 6 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 1/8 79
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 30 27 19 26 16 25 2 13 8 47 M6 x 1 depth 12 6 14 M14 x 1.5 44 1/8 87
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 35 32 27 32 20 30 2 14 11 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16 7 18 M18 x 1.5 55 1/4 102
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 35 32 27 38 20 32 2 14 11 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16 7 18 M18 x 1.5 69 1/4 102
80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 40 37 32 50 25 40 3 20 13 89 M10 x 1.5 depth 22 10 22 M22 x 1.5 86 3/8 122
100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 40 37 41 60 30 50 3 20 16 110 M12 x 1.75 depth 22 10 26 M26 x 1.5 106 1/2 122
With rod boot∗
Without rod boot With rod boot on one side∗ Female Rod End [mm]
Bore on both sides
size
TA TC∗∗ Bore
H ZZ e f h JH JW
IJ (Reference) (Reference) l ZZ ZZ A1 H MM ZZ
size
20 11 M5 x 0.8 35 147 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 167 187 20 8 13 M4 x 0.7 103
25 11 M6 x 0.75 40 157 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 179 201 25 8 14 M5 x 0.8 105
32 11 M8 x 1.0 40 159 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 181 203 32 12 14 M6 x 1 107
/4 stroke

40 12 M10 x 1.25 50 187 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 207 227 40 13 15 M8 x 1.25 117

50 13 M12 x 1.25 58 218 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 238 258 50 18 16 M10 x 1.5 134
63 13 M14 x 1.5 58 218 238 258 63 18 16 M10 x 1.5 134
1

40 20 78 72 24 10.5
80 — — 71 264 52 10 80 59 — — 273 282 80 21 19 M14 x 1.5 160
100 — — 71 264 62 7 80 71 — — 273 282 100 25 22 M16 x 1.5 166
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.
∗∗ Cylinder sizes ø 80 and ø 100 do not have trunnion mounting female thread on the width across flats NA.
27
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CG1W

Basic with Air Cushion: CG1WBA

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
2xP
WA WA 8xJ
(Rc, NPT, G)
10° Wθ° Width across flats KA F GA GA F Width across flats KA 10° Wθ°
Cushion valve, Width across flats WH
MM
MM H1 H1

øD
øD

Double Acting, Double Rod

øI
øE−0.05

øE−0.05

CG1W
Standard
0

C
.4

R0
Width across
R0

.4
flats B1 AL AL Width across flats B1
A K TA 4 x TC TA K A C

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

H S + Stroke H + Stroke NA
ZZ + 2 Stroke

CG1
 For the one with rod boot, refer to w/rubber bumper. [mm]
Stroke range
Bore size A AL B1 C D E F GA H H1 I J K KA

Double Acting, Single Rod

Standard Long stroke
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 18 15.5 13 14 8 12 2 12 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7 5 6

CG1K
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 14 2 12.5 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5 5.5 8
32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 22 19.5 17 20 12 18 2 12 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 10
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 30 27 19 26 16 25 2 13 50 8 47 M6 x 1 depth 12 6 14

Non-rotating Rod
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 35 32 27 32 20 30 2 14 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16 7 18
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 35 32 27 38 20 32 2 14 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16 7 18
80 Up to 300 301 to 1500 40 37 32 50 25 40 3 20 71 13 89 M10 x 1.5 depth 22 10 22

Double Acting, Double Rod

100 Up to 300 301 to 1500 40 37 41 60 30 50 3 20 71 16 110 M12 x 1.75 depth 22 10 26

CG1KW
∗ For mounting brackets, refer to page 22.
Bore size MM NA P S TA TC∗∗ ZZ WA Wθ WH ∗∗ Cylinder sizes ø 80 and ø 100 do not
20 M8 x 1.25 24 M5 x 0.8 77 11 M5 x 0.8 147 16 25° 1.5 have trunnion mounting female thread
on the width across flats NA.
25 M10 x 1.25 29 M5 x 0.8 77 11 M6 x 0.75 157 16 25° 1.5
32 M10 x 1.25 35.5 Rc1/8 79 11 M8 x 1.0 159 16 25° 1.5
40 M14 x 1.5 44 Rc1/8 87 12 M10 x 1.25 187 17 20° 1.5

Double Acting, Single Rod

50 M18 x 1.5 55 Rc1/4 102 13 M12 x 1.25 218 18 20° 3

Direct Mount
63

CG1R
M18 x 1.5 69 Rc1/4 102 13 M14 x 1.5 218 18 20° 3
80 M22 x 1.5 86 Rc3/8 122 — — 264 24 20° 4
100 M26 x 1.5 106 Rc1/2 122 — — 264 24 20° 4
∗ Refer to w/rubber bumper for the female rod end.

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
With End Lock

CBG1
Auto Switch
Made to Order

28
Series CG1W

With Mounting Bracket

Axial foot: CG1WL쏔

B
LH
15°
LT

LX
W 2 × øLC W LZ
X Y (Knock pin position) Y X M 4 x øLD
Z LS + Stroke

[mm]
Stroke
Bore size
range B LC LD LH LS LT LX LZ M W X Y Z
20 Up to 1500 34 4 6 20 53 3 32 44 3 10 15 7 47
25 Up to 1500 38.5 4 6 22 53 3 36 49 3.5 10 15 7 52
32 Up to 1500 45 4 7 25 53 3 44 58 3.5 10 16 8 53
40 Up to 1500 54.5 4 7 30 60 3 54 71 4 10 16.5 8.5 63.5
50 Up to 1500 70.5 5 10 40 67 4.5 66 86 5 17.5 22 11 75.5
63 Up to 1500 82.5 5 12 45 67 4.5 82 106 5 17.5 22 13 75.5
80 Up to 1500 101 6 11 55 74 4.5 100 125 5 20 28.5 14 95
100 Up to 1500 121 6 14 65 74 6 120 150 7 20 30 16 95
∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic type.

Flange: CG1WF쏔
F FT 4 x øFD
FX±0.15
øE–0.05

B
0

H FX±0.15
B

[mm]
Stroke
Bore size
range B E F FX FD FT H
20 Up to 1500 40 12 2 28 5.5 6 35
25 Up to 1500 44 14 2 32 5.5 7 40
32 Up to 1500 53 18 2 38 6.6 7 40
40 Up to 1500 61 25 2 46 6.6 8 50
50 Up to 1500 76 30 2 58 9 9 58
63 Up to 1500 92 32 2 70 11 9 58
80 Up to 1500 104 40 3 82 11 11 71
100 Up to 1500 128 50 3 100 14 14 71
∗ End boss is machined on the flange for ø E.
∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic type.

29
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CG1W

Double Acting, Single Rod

With Mounting Bracket

CG1
Trunnion: CG1WU쏔

Double Acting, Double Rod

TR

CG1W
Standard
TS Bracket mounting range

2 x øTDe8
(Pin O.D.)

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

B

CG1
TH
TT
TY

Double Acting, Single Rod

TW TX 4 x øTF
Z TV

CG1K
+0.10
TZ øTE 0

Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
[mm]
Stroke Z
Bore size
range B TDe8 TE TF TH TR TS TT TV TW TX TY TZ

Double Acting, Single Rod

Without rod boot With rod boot
–0.025

Direct Mount
20 Up to 1500 38 8–0.047 10 5.5 25 39 28 3.2 (35.8) 42 16 28 47.6 46 66 + l

CG1R
25 Up to 1500 45.5 10–0.025
–0.047 10 5.5 30 43 33 3.2 (39.8) 42 20 28 53 51 73 + l
32 Up to 1500 54 12–0.032
–0.059 10 6.6 35 54.5 40 4.5 (49.4) 48 22 28 67.7 51 73 + l
40 Up to 1500 63.5 14–0.032
–0.059 10 6.6 40 65.5 49 4.5 (58.4) 56 30 30 78.7 62 82 + l
50 Up to 1500 79 16–0.032
–0.059 20 9 50 80 60 6 (72.4) 64 36 36 98.6 71 91 + l
63 Up to 1500 96 18–0.032
–0.059 20 11 60 98 74 8 (90.4) 74 46 46 119.2 71 91 + l
∗ Constructed of a pin, flat washer and hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic type.

CG1KR
With End Lock

CBG1
Auto Switch
Made to Order

30
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Series CG1
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40
How to Order

Cylinder stroke [mm] Action Pivot

ot bracket
Refer to “Standard Strokes” on page 32. S Single acting, Spring return — None
T Single acting, Spring extend N Pivot bracket is shipped together with the product.
Type ∗ Only for D, U, T mounting types
N Rubber bumper ∗ Pivot bracket is shipped together with the product, but not
assembled.

CG1 B N 25 100 S Z
With auto switch CDG1 B N 25 100 S Z M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Rod end thread Number of
Mounting auto switches
— Male rod end
B Basic G Head flange F Female rod end — 2 pcs.
Basic (without trunnion U Rod trunnion S 1 pc.
Z mounting female thread) Bore size n “n” pcs.
T Head trunnion Rod end bracket
L Axial foot D Clevis 20 20 mm — None
F Rod flange 25 25 mm Auto switch
V Single knuckle joint
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product, but not assembled. 32 32 mm W Double knuckle joint — Without auto switch
∗ The cylinder for F, G, L, D mounting types is Z: Basic 40 40 mm ∗ For applicable auto switches, refer
∗ No bracket is provided for the female rod end. to the table below.
(without trunnion mounting female thread).
∗ Rod end bracket is shipped together with the
product, but not assembled.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model ∗ A knuckle joint pin is not provided with the Made to Order
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required, single knuckle joint. For details, refer to page 32.
there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch.
(Example) CDG1FN32-100TZ
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switches Guide for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]

Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 40
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N     —  IC
5 V, 12 V
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P     —  circuit
Solid state auto switch

———
M9BV M9B     — 
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C  —    —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW     —  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW     —  circuit
(2-colour indication) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW     —  —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗     —  IC
Water resistant 5 V, 12 V
(2-colour indication)
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗     —  circuit
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗     —  —
Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF  —   —  IC circuit
3-wire IC
— 5V — A96V A96  —  — — — —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN) circuit
Reed auto switch

100 V A93V A93  —   — — —

Grommet
No 100 V or less A90V A90  —  — — — IC circuit
———
Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —
PLC
Yes — — C73C  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None··············· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to the Auto Switches Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
31
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Series CG1

Specifications

Double Acting, Single Rod

Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 20 25 32 40

CG1
Action Single acting, Spring return Single acting, Spring extend
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Spring return Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa

Double Acting, Double Rod

Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa

CG1W
Standard
Minimum operating pressure 0.18 MPa 0.23 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C
(No freezing)
temperature With auto switch : –10 °C to 60 °C
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
+1.4
Spring extend Stroke length tolerance Up to 200 st 0 mm

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Cushion Rubber bumper
Symbol Basic, Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread),

CG1
Axial foot, Rod flange, Head flange,
Spring return, Rubber bumper Mounting
Rod trunnion, Head trunnion,
Clevis (used for changing the port location by 90°)

Accessories

Double Acting, Single Rod

Spring extend, Rubber bumper

CG1K
Axial Rod Head Rod Head
Mounting Basic Clevis
foot flange flange trunnion trunnion

Non-rotating Rod
Rod end nut       
Standard
Clevis pin — — — — — — 

Double Acting, Double Rod

Single knuckle joint       

CG1KW
Made to Order Double knuckle joint∗
Option
(with pin)       
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.)
Symbol Specifications Pivot bracket — — — —   
-XC6 Made of stainless steel∗1 ∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are shipped together.
-XC20 Head cover axial port∗2

Double Acting, Single Rod

-XC27 Double clevis and double knuckle joint pins made of stainless steel

Direct Mount
Double knuckle joint with spring pin∗1 Standard Strokes Theoretical Output

CG1R
-XC29
-XC85 Grease for food processing equipment [mm] Consult SMC
∗1 Applicable only to single acting, spring return type. Bore size Standard stroke Note1)
For single acting, spring extend type, please 20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125 Spring Reaction Force
contact SMC.
∗2 Only compatible with cylinders with rubber bumper. 25, 32, 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 Consult SMC

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm

CG1KR
intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with
Note 2) Applicable strokes should be confirmed
auto switches. according to the usage. For details, refer to “Air
• Auto switch proper mounting position Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting products that exceed the standard stroke might
height not be able to fulfill the specifications due to the
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting deflection etc.
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no.
With End Lock

• Operating range
CBG1

• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/

Auto switch mounting surfaces
Mounting Brackets/Part No.

Mounting Order Bore size [mm]

Contents
Precautions bracket q’ty. 20 25 32 40
Auto Switch

2 foots,
Axial foot 2 Note) CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040
8 mounting bolts
Be sure to read this before handling.
Refer to the back cover for Safety Flange 1 CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040
1 flange,
Instructions. For Actuator and Auto 4 mounting bolts
Switch Precautions, refer to “Handling 2 trunnion pins, 2 trunnion bolts,
Trunnion pin 1 CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040
Precautions for SMC Products” and 2 flat washers
Made to Order

the Operation Manual on SMC website, 1 clevis, 4 mounting bolts,

Clevis 1 CG-D020 CG-D025 CG-D032 CG-D040
http://www.smc.eu 1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings

Pivot bracket 1 CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A 1 pivot bracket

Refer to page 10 for Handling and Disassembly/
Replacement. Note) Order two foots per cylinder.
32
Series CG1
Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
Clevis
Cylinder model: CDG1DN20-100Z-NW-M9BW

Auto switch

Mounting D: Clevis
Pivot bracket N: Yes
Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint Pivot bracket
Auto switch D-M9BW: 2 pcs.

∗ Pivot bracket, double knuckle joint and auto

switch are shipped together with the product, but
not assembled. Double knuckle joint

Weights
Spring return [kg] Spring extend [kg]
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40
25 st 0.17 0.27 0.40 0.63 25 st 0.16 0.25 0.38 0.59
50 st 0.19 0.30 0.45 0.71 50 st 0.18 0.28 0.43 0.67
75 st 0.26 0.40 0.58 0.91 75 st 0.24 0.37 0.54 0.83
Basic Basic
100 st 0.28 0.43 0.62 0.99 100 st 0.26 0.40 0.58 0.91
weight weight
125 st 0.35 0.53 0.76 1.20 125 st 0.32 0.48 0.69 1.08
150 st — 0.56 0.81 1.28 150 st — 0.50 0.72 1.12
200 st — 0.69 0.98 1.56 200 st — 0.63 0.89 1.40
Axial foot 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.22 Axial foot 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.22
Mounting Flange 0.08 0.10 0.14 0.20 Mounting Flange 0.08 0.10 0.14 0.20
bracket bracket
weight Trunnion 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05 weight Trunnion 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05
Clevis 0.05 0.08 0.15 0.23 Clevis 0.05 0.08 0.15 0.23
Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25 Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25
Accessories Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 Accessories Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13
Weight reduction for female rod end −0.01 −0.02 −0.02 −0.05 Weight reduction for female rod end −0.01 −0.02 −0.02 −0.05
Calculation (Example) CG1LN20-100SZ 앫Basic weight·····························0.28 kg (ø 20) Calculation (Example) CG1LN20-100TZ 앫Basic weight····························0.26 kg (ø 20)
(Foot, ø 20, 100 stroke) 앫Mounting bracket weight ········· 0.11 kg (Foot) (Foot, ø 20, 100 stroke) 앫Mounting bracket weight ·········0.11 kg (Foot)
0.28 + 0.11 = 0.39 kg 0.26 + 0.11 = 0.37 kg

33
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Series CG1

Construction

Double Acting, Single Rod

Single acting, Spring return

CG1
o r t !3 q y !1 !0 !2 !5 e i u w

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
Single acting, Spring extend

CG1
o r !4 q t !6 y !5 e i u !2 !0 !1 !3 w

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
Component Parts Replacement Part: Seal
No. Description Material Note ¡For single acting, spring return
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised Part no.
No. Description Material
2 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 20 25 32 40

Double Acting, Single Rod

3 Piston Aluminium alloy 15 Piston seal NBR CG1N20-S-PS CG1N25-S-PS CG1N32-S-PS CG1N40-S-PS

Direct Mount

CG1R
Stainless steel For ø 20 or ø 25 with built-in magnet
4 Piston rod ¡For single acting, spring extend
Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗
Replacement parts/Seal kits are the same as standard type, double
5 Bushing Bearing alloy
acting, single rod (with rubber bumper). Refer to page 11.
6 Bumper Resin ø 32 or larger is
7 Bumper Resin common.
Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on page 10 for Disassem-

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

8 Wear ring Resin
bly/Replacement. Order with the kit number according to the bore

CG1KR
9 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated size.
10 Return spring Steel wire Zinc chromated ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
11 Spring guide Aluminium alloy Order with the following part number when only the grease pack is
needed.
12 Spring seat Aluminium alloy
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
13 Plug with breathing hole Alloy steel Black zinc chromated
14 Rod seal NBR
15 Piston seal NBR
With End Lock

CBG1

16 Tube gasket NBR

Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston.
∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of stainless steel.
Auto Switch
Made to Order

34
Series CG1

Basic
Spring return: CG1BN

Width across flats KA F GA Plug with fixed orifice RcP GB

MM H1 .4
R0

øD

øI

øE–0.05
øE–0.05

0
0

C
Width across flats B1 AL 4
0.
R

A K TA 4 x TC TB
H S + Stroke F C 8×J
ZZ + Stroke NA

Spring extend: CG1BN

Width across flats KA F GA RcP Plug with fixed orifice GB

MM H1 .4
R0
øD

øI
øE–0.05

øE–0.05
0

C
AL
4

Width across
0.
R

flats B1 A K TA 4 x TC TB
H + Stroke S + Stroke F C 8xJ
ZZ + 2 Stroke NA

Female rod end

MM
thread depth A1

H
ZZ + Stroke

[mm]
Stroke
Bore size
range
A AL B1 C D E F GA GB H H1 I J K KA MM NA P
20 Up to 125 18 15.5 13 14 8 12 2 12 10 35 5 26 M4 × 0.7 depth 7 5 6 M8 x 1.25 24 1/8
25 Up to 200 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 14 2 12 10 40 6 31 M5 × 0.8 depth 7.5 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 29 1/8
32 Up to 200 22 19.5 17 20 12 18 2 12 10 40 6 38 M5 × 0.8 depth 8 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 1/8
40 Up to 200 30 27 19 26 16 25 2 13 10 50 8 47 M6 × 1 depth 12 6 14 M14 x 1.5 44 1/8

Bore size TA
1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st Female Rod End [mm]
TB TC
S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ S ZZ Bore 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
20 11 11 M5 x 0.8 94 131 119 156 144 181 — — size
A1 H MM
ZZ ZZ ZZ ZZ
25 11 11 M6 x 0.75 94 136 119 161 144 186 169 211 20 8 13 M4 x 0.7 109 134 159 —
32 11 10 M8 x 1.0 96 138 121 163 146 188 171 213 25 8 14 M5 x 0.8 110 135 160 185
40 12 10 M10 x 1.25 103 155 128 180 153 205 178 230 32 12 14 M6 x 1 112 137 162 187
40 13 15 M8 x 1.25 120 145 170 195

35
 Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Series CG1

With Mounting Bracket ( )

Note) The drawings below show the single acting/spring return type.
The rod is in retracted state for spring extend type.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Axial foot: CG1LN

CG1
B

Double Acting, Double Rod

15°

LH
LT

CG1W
Standard
W 2 x øLC W LX
X Y (Knock pin position) Y X M LZ
Z LS + Stroke 4 x øLD
ZZ + Stroke

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

[mm]

CG1
Bore Stroke 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
size range
B M LC LD LH LT LX LZ W X Y Z
LS ZZ LS ZZ LS ZZ LS ZZ
20 Up to 125 34 3 4 6 20 3 32 44 10 15 7 47 70 135 95 160 120 185 — —
25 Up to 200 38.5 3.5 4 6 22 3 36 49 10 15 7 52 70 140.5 95 165.5 120 190.5 145 215.5
32 Up to 200 45 3.5 4 7 25 3 44 58 10 16 8 53 70 142.5 95 167.5 120 192.5 145 217.5

Double Acting, Single Rod

40 Up to 200 54.5 4 4 7 30 3 54 71 10 16.5 8.5 63.5 76 160 101 185 126 210 151 235

CG1K
Rod flange: CG1FN

Non-rotating Rod
F FT 4 x øFD

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
FX±0.15
øE–0.05
0

Double Acting, Single Rod

H FX±0.15

Direct Mount

CG1R
B

Head flange: CG1GN

4 x øFD
0 ∗
øE–0.05

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
FX±0.15
B

FT F
FX±0.15 H
With End Lock

CBG1

B ZZ + Stroke

[mm] Rod Flange [mm]

Bore Stroke Bore ZZ
size range B E F FX FD FT H size 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
Auto Switch

20 Up to 125 40 12 2 28 5.5 6 35 20 131 156 181 —

25 Up to 200 44 14 2 32 5.5 7 40 25 136 161 186 211
32 Up to 200 53 18 2 38 6.6 7 40 32 138 163 188 213
40 Up to 200 61 25 2 46 6.6 8 50 40 155 180 205 230
∗ End boss is machined on the flange for øE.
Head Flange [mm]
Made to Order

Bore ZZ
size 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
20 130 162 187 —
25 143 168 193 218
32 145 170 195 220
40 163 188 213 238
36
Series CG1

With Mounting Bracket

TR
Rod trunnion: CG1UN TS Bracket mounting range

2 x øTDe8
(Pin O.D.)
∗

B
TH
TT
Z
TX 4 x øTF
ZZ + Stroke
TV
TY +0.10
TZ øTE 0
TW

Head trunnion: CG1TN

TR
TS
2 x øTDe8

Bracket mounting range

(Pin O.D.)

∗
B
TH
TT

Z + Stroke
TX 4 x øTF ZZ + Stroke
TV TY
+0.10
TZ øTE 0 TW
[mm]
Bore size Stroke range B TDe8 TE TF TH TR TS TT TV TW TX TY TZ
20 Up to 125 38 8–0.025
–0.047 10 5.5 25 39 28 3.2 (35.8) 42 16 28 47.6
25 Up to 200 45.5 10–0.025
–0.047 10 5.5 30 43 33 3.2 (39.8) 42 20 28 53
32 Up to 200 54 12–0.032
–0.059 10 6.6 35 54.5 40 4.5 (49.4) 48 22 28 67.7
40 Up to 200 63.5 14–0.032
–0.059 10 6.6 40 65.5 49 4.5 (58.4) 56 30 30 78.7
Rod Trunnion [mm] Head Trunnion [mm]
Bore ZZ Bore 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
size Z 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st size Z ZZ Z ZZ Z ZZ Z ZZ
20 46 131 156 181 — 20 118 139 143 164 168 189 — —
25 51 136 161 186 211 25 123 144 148 169 173 194 198 219
32 51 138 163 188 213 32 126 150 151 175 176 200 201 225
40 62 155 180 205 230 40 143 171 168 196 193 221 218 246
∗ Constructed of pins, flat washers and hexagon socket head cap bolts. ∗ Constructed of pins, flat washers and hexagon socket head cap bolts.
∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic type. ∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic type.
Clevis: CG1DN
CZ
C±0.1 TT 8 x J L RR
øCD hole H10
Axis d9
C±0.1

B
TH
TT

Z + Stroke
+0.10
4 x øTF TX øTE 0 ZZ + Stroke
TV TY
TZ TW
(The above shows the case port location is changed by 90°.)
Clevis [mm]
Bore Stroke 1 to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
size range B CD CZ L RR TE TF TH TT TV TW TX TY TZ
Z ZZ Z ZZ Z ZZ Z ZZ
20 Up to 125 38 8 29 14 11 10 5.5 25 3.2 (35.8) 42 16 28 43.4 143 164 168 189 193 214 — —
25 Up to 200 45.5 10 33 16 13 10 5.5 30 3.2 (39.8) 42 20 28 48 150 171 175 196 200 221 225 246
32 Up to 200 54 12 40 20 15 10 6.6 35 4.5 (49.4) 48 22 28 59.4 156 180 181 205 206 230 231 255
40 Up to 200 63.5 14 49 22 18 10 6.6 40 4.5 (58.4) 56 30 30 71.4 175 200 200 228 225 253 250 278
∗ For dimensions of pivot bracket, refer to page 22. ∗ Other dimensions are the same as basic type.
37
 Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting

Series CG1K

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63
How to Order

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
Type Cylinder stroke [mm] Pivot bracket
N Rubber bumper Refer to “Standard Strokes” on — None
page 39.
Air cushion N Pivot bracket is shipped together with the product.
A (ø 40 to ø 63 only) ∗ Only for D, U, T mounting types
∗ Pivot bracket is shipped together with the product, but not assembled.

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1K B N 25 100 Z

CG1
With auto switch CDG1K B N 25 100 Z M9BW
With auto switch (Built-in magnet)

Double Acting, Single Rod

Bore size Rod end bracket
Double acting, Non-rotating rod type Number of
20 20 mm — None

CG1K
Mounting 25 25 mm V Single knuckle joint auto switches
B Basic G Head flange 32 32 mm W Double knuckle joint — 2 pcs.
S 1 pc.

Non-rotating Rod
Basic (without trunnion U Rod trunnion
Z∗ mounting female thread) 40 40 mm ∗ No bracket is provided for the female
n “n” pcs.
T Head trunnion 50 50 mm rod end.
L Axial foot D Clevis ∗ Rod end bracket is shipped together
63 63 mm
with the product, but not assembled. Auto switch

Double Acting, Double Rod

F Rod flange ∗ A knuckle joint pin is not provided with — Without auto switch

CG1KW
Note) Mounting bracket is shipped together with the product, but not assembled. the single knuckle joint. ∗ For applicable auto switches,
∗ The cylinder for F, G, L, D mounting types is Z: Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread).
refer to the table below.
Rod end thread
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model — Male rod end Made to Order
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required,
F Female rod end For details, refer to page 39.
there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch.
(Example) CDG1KFA32-100Z

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switches Guide for further information on auto switches.

CG1R
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]

Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 63 connector
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N     —  IC
5 V, 12 V

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P     —  circuit
Solid state auto switch

———
M9BV M9B     — 

CG1KR
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C  —    —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW     —  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW     —  circuit
(2-colour indication) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW     —  —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗     —  IC
Water resistant 5 V, 12 V
(2-colour indication)
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗     —  circuit
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗     —  —
With End Lock

   
CBG1

Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF — — IC circuit

3-wire IC
— 5V — A96V A96  —  — — — —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN) circuit
Reed auto switch

100 V A93V A93  —   — — —

Grommet
No 100 V or less A90V A90  —  — — — IC circuit
———
Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —
Auto Switch

PLC
Yes — — C73C  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
Made to Order

1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM

3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None··············· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
38
Series CG1K
Specifications

Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63

Action Double acting, Single rod
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C
(No freezing)
temperature With auto switch : –10 °C to 60 °C
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s
Symbol Stroke length tolerance +1.4 +1.8
Up to 1000 st 0 mm, Up to 1500 st 0 mm
Rubber bumper Air cushion Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion (ø 40 to ø 63 only)
Rod non-rotating accuracy Note) ±1° ±0.8° ±0.5°

Basic, Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread),

Axial foot, Rod flange, Head flange,
Mounting
Rod trunnion, Head trunnion,
Clevis (used for changing the port location by 90°)

Note) The values are for standard strokes.

Accessories
Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.)
Axial Rod Head Rod Head
Mounting Basic Clevis
Symbol Specifications foot flange flange trunnion trunnion
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape Rod end nut       
Standard
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type∗1 Clevis pin — — — — — — 
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type∗1 Single knuckle joint       
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type
Double knuckle joint∗
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type∗1 Option       
(With pin)
-XC12 Tandem cylinder∗1, ∗2
Pivot bracket — — — —   
-XC13 Auto switch rail mounting∗1
∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are shipped together.
-XC20 Head cover axial port∗1
-XC27 Double clevis and double knuckle joint pins made of stainless steel
Standard Strokes
∗1 Only compatible with cylinders with rubber bumper.
∗2 The shape is the same as the existing product. [mm]
Use the existing seal kit. Bore size Standard stroke Note 1) Maximum manufacturable stroke Note 2)
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 201 to 1500
25
Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with
32
auto switches. 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300 301 to 1500
40
• Auto switch proper mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting 50, 63
height Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Note 2) The maximum manufacturable stroke shows the long stroke.
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no. Note 3) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to “Air
• Operating range Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the products that exceed the standard stroke
• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/ might not be able to fulfill the specifications due to the deflection etc.
Auto switch mounting surfaces

Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Clevis
Cylinder model: CDG1KDN20-100Z-NW-M9BW

Auto switch

Mounting D: Clevis
Pivot bracket N: Yes
Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint Pivot bracket
Auto switch D-M9BW: 2 pcs.

∗ Pivot bracket, double knuckle joint and auto

switch are shipped together with the product,
but not assembled. Double knuckle joint

39
 Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting Series CG1K

Weights

Double Acting, Single Rod

[kg]
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63

CG1
Basic 0.10 0.17 0.26 0.41 0.77 1.07
Basic weight

Axial foot 0.21 0.30 0.42 0.63 1.25 1.79

Flange 0.18 0.27 0.40 0.61 1.11 1.57
Trunnion 0.11 0.19 0.29 0.46 0.91 1.21

Double Acting, Double Rod

Clevis 0.15 0.25 0.41 0.64 1.17 1.75
Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25 0.44 0.80

CG1W
Standard
Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.15 0.22 0.26
Additional weight with air cushion — — — 0 0.01 0.04
Additional weight for long stroke 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.06 0.12

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Weight reduction for female rod end −0.01 −0.02 −0.02 −0.05 −0.10 −0.10
Calculation (Example) CG1KLN20-100Z 앫Basic weight ····················· 0.21 (Foot , ø 20)

CG1
(Foot, ø 20, 100 stroke) 앫Additional weight ·············· 0.05/50 stroke
앫Air cylinder stroke············· 100 stroke
0.21 + 0.05 x 100/50 = 0.31 kg

Double Acting, Single Rod

Mounting Brackets/Part No.

CG1K
Mounting Order Bore size [mm]
Contents
bracket q’ty. 20 25 32 40 50 63

Non-rotating Rod
2 foots,
Axial foot 2 Note) CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040 CG-L050 CG-L063
8 mounting bolts
1 flange,
Flange 1 CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040 CG-F050 CG-F063

Double Acting, Double Rod

4 mounting bolts

CG1KW
2 trunnion pins, 2 trunnion bolts,
Trunnion pin 1 CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040 CG-T050 CG-T063
2 flat washers
1 clevis, 4 mounting bolts,
Clevis 1 CG-D020 CG-D025 CG-D032 CG-D040 CG-D050 CG-D063
1 clevis pin, 2 retaining rings
Pivot bracket 1 CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A CG-050-24A CG-063-24A 1 pivot bracket
Note) Order two foots per cylinder.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
With End Lock

CBG1
Auto Switch
Made to Order

40
Series CG1K

Construction

With rubber bumper

o r !8 t @0 q w y !9 eiu !7 @0 !6

Long stroke
t

ø 20 to ø 32

With air cushion

!2 o r !8 t q @0 !3 !5 w e !9 i !0 !4 @1 !1 !7 @0 !6

Long stroke

Component Parts Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

No. Description Material Note Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 20 CG1KN20Z-PS
Set of the
2 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 25 CG1KN25Z-PS
nos.
32 CG1KN32Z-PS
!8, !9, @0
3 Piston Aluminium alloy
40 CG1KN40Z-PS
Stainless steel For ø 20 or ø 25 with built-in magnet
4 Piston rod Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on
Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ page 10 for Disassembly/Replacement.
5 Non-rotating guide Bearing alloy Order with the kit number according to the
6 Bumper Resin bore size.
ø 32 or larger is common. ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
7 Bumper Resin
Order with the following part number when only
8 Wear ring Resin the grease pack is needed.
9 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
10 Seal retainer Rolled steel Zinc chromated
ø 40 or smaller Carbon steel Electroless nickel plating
11 Cushion valve
ø 50 or larger Steel wire Zinc chromated
12 Steel ball Carbon steel
13 Cushion seal A Urethane
ø 32 or larger is common.
14 Cushion seal B Urethane
15 Cushion seal holder Aluminium alloy
16 Head cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised
17 Cylinder tube Aluminium alloy Hard anodised
18 Rod seal NBR
19 Piston seal NBR
20 Tube gasket NBR
21 Valve seal NBR
Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston.
∗ The material is stainless steel for ø 20 to ø 32.
41
 Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting Series CG1K

Basic

Double Acting, Single Rod

With rubber bumper
ø 20 to ø 63

CG1
Width across flats KA F GA 2 x RcP GB 8xJ
MM H1 .4
R0
øD

øI
øE−0.05

øE−0.05

Double Acting, Double Rod

0

CG1W
Standard
4

Width across AL
.
R0

flats B1 A TA 4 x TC TB
H S + Stroke F C
ZZ + Stroke NA

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

With air cushion
ø 40 to ø 63 WA 2xP WB

CG1
Width across flats KA F GA Cushion valve, Width across flats WH GB Wθ°
8xJ 10°
MM H1 .4
R0
øD

øI

With Air Cushion

øE−0.05
øE−0.05

[mm]

Double Acting, Single Rod

0

C
0

Bore
size
WA WB Wθ WH

CG1K
40 17 15 (17) 20° 1.5
.4

Width across AL
R0

flats B1 A TA 4 x TC TB 50 18 16 (18) 20° 3

Non-rotating Rod
H S + Stroke F C 63 18 17 (18) 20° 3
Note) ( ): Denotes the dimensions
ZZ + Stroke NA
for long stroke.

Double Acting, Double Rod

Female rod end MM Female Rod End

CG1KW
[mm]
thread depth A1 Bore
A1 H MM ZZ
size
20 8 13 M4 x 0.7 84 (92)
25 8 14 M5 x 0.8 85 (93)
32 12 14 M6 x 1 87 (95)
40 13 15 M8 x 1.25 95 (104)

Double Acting, Single Rod

50 18 16 M10 x 1.5 108 (120)

Direct Mount
H

CG1R
63 18 16 M10 x 1.5 108 (120)
ZZ + Stroke
[mm]
Bore Stroke range
size Standard Long stroke
A AL B1 C D E F GA GB H H1 I J KA MM NA P S TA TB TC ZZ
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 18 15.5 13 14 9.2 12 2 12 10 (12) 35 5 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7 8 M8 x 1.25 24 1/8 69 (77) 11 11 M5 x 0.8 106 (114)
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 22 19.5 17 16.5 11 14 2 12 10 (12) 40 6 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5 10 M10 x 1.25 29 1/8 69 (77) 11 11 M6 x 0.75 111 (119)

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 22 19.5 17 20 12 18 2 12 10 (12) 40 6 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 1/8 71 (79) 11 10 (11) M8 x 1.0 113 (121)

CG1KR
40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 30 27 19 26 16 25 2 13 10 (13) 50 8 47 M6 x 1 depth 12 14 M14 x 1.5 44 1/8 78 (87) 12 10 (12) M10 x 1.25 130 (139)
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 35 32 27 32 20 30 2 14 12 (14) 58 11 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16 18 M18 x 1.5 55 1/4 90 (102) 13 12 (13) M12 x 1.25 150 (162)
63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 35 32 27 38 20 32 2 14 12 (14) 58 11 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16 18 M18 x 1.5 69 1/4 90 (102) 13 12 (13) M14 x 1.5 150 (162)
Note 1) Dimensions for each mounting bracket are the same as those for the CG1 standard or long stroke model. Refer to pages 14 to 20.
Note 2) ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

Precautions
With End Lock

CBG1

Be sure to read this before handling. Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch
Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website,
http://www.smc.eu
∗ Caution on handling/disassembly is provided in addition to that shown below. Refer to page 10.
Auto Switch

Handling/Disassembly
Caution that protrudes. Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the tightening
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that torque from being applied to the non-rotating guide.
rotational torque would be applied to the piston rod.
¡If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will become deformed,
thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy. Refer to the table below for the
Made to Order

approximate values of the allowable range of rotational torque.

Allowable rotational torque ø 20 ø 25, ø 32 ø 40, ø 50, ø 63
(N·m or less) 0.2 0.25 0.44 2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.
¡To screw a bracket or a nut onto the piston rod, make sure to retract the Air leakage may be happened, depending on the position in which a
piston rod entirely, and place a wrench over the flat portion of the rod rod seal is fitted. Thus, please contact SMC when replacing them.
42
 Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting, Double Rod

Series CG1KW
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63
How to Order

CG1KW L N 25 100 Z
With auto switch CDG1KW L N 25 100 Z M9BW
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Number of
auto switches
Non-rotating rod type
— 2 pcs.
S 1 pc.
Double acting, Double rod type
n “n” pcs.
Mounting
Auto switch
B Basic
— Without auto switch
Z∗ Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread) Type
∗ For applicable auto switches, refer to
L Axial foot N Rubber bumper the table below.
F Flange
U Trunnion Bore size Cylinder stroke [mm]
∗ Mounting bracket is shipped together with the Refer to “Standard Strokes” on page 44.
20 20 mm
product, but not assembled.
∗ The cylinder for F, L mounting types is Z: Basic 25 25 mm
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model
(without trunnion mounting female thread). 32 32 mm
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto
40 40 mm
switch is required, there is no need to enter the
50 50 mm symbol for the auto switch.
63 63 mm (Example) CDG1KWFN32-100Z

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]

Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 63
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N     —  IC
5 V, 12 V
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P     —  circuit
Solid state auto switch

—
M9BV M9B     — 
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C  —    —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW     —  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW     —  circuit
(2-colour indication) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW     —  —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗     —  IC
Water resistant 5 V, 12 V
(2-colour indication)
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗     —  circuit
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗     —  —
Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF  —   —  IC circuit
3-wire IC
— 5V — A96V A96  —  — — — —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN) circuit
Reed auto switch

100 V A93V A93  —   — — —

Grommet
No 100 V or less A90V A90  —  — — — IC circuit
—
Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —
PLC
Yes — — C73C  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None··············· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)
43
 Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CG1KW

Double Acting, Single Rod

Specifications

CG1
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63
Action Double acting, Double rod
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air

Double Acting, Double Rod

Proof pressure 1.5 MPa

CG1W
Standard
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa

Symbol Minimum operating pressure 0.08 MPa

Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C
Rubber bumper temperature
(No freezing)
With auto switch : –10 °C to 60 °C
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

+1.4 +1.8
Stroke length tolerance Up to 1000 st 0 mm, Up to 1500 st 0 mm

CG1
Cushion Rubber bumper
Rod non-rotating accuracy Note) ±1° ±0.8° ±0.5°
Basic, Basic (without trunnion mounting female thread),
Mounting
Axial foot, Flange, Trunnion
∗ Foot and flange types of cylinder sizes from ø 20 to ø 63 do not have trunnion mounting female

Double Acting, Single Rod

thread. Operate the cylinder within the allowable kinetic energy. Refer to page 24 for details.
Note) The values are for standard strokes.

CG1K
Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with

Non-rotating Rod
auto switches. Accessories
• Auto switch proper mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting

Double Acting, Double Rod

Mounting Basic Axial foot Flange Trunnion
height

CG1KW
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting Standard Rod end nut    
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no. Single knuckle joint    
• Operating range
Option Double knuckle joint (with pin)∗    
• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/
Auto switch mounting surfaces Pivot bracket — — — 
∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are shipped together.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
Weights Standard Strokes
[kg] [mm]
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 Bore size Standard stroke Note 1) Maximum manufacturable stroke Note 2)
Basic weight

Basic 0.13 0.22 0.33 0.55 1.02 1.37

20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 201 to 1500
Axial foot 0.24 0.35 0.49 0.77 1.50 2.09

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

25
Flange 0.21 0.32 0.47 0.75 1.36 1.87

CG1KR
Trunnion 0.14 0.24 0.36 0.60 1.16 1.51 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200,
301 to 1500
Pivot bracket 0.08 0.09 0.17 0.25 0.44 0.80 40 250, 300

Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22 50, 63
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26 Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible.
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.07 0.10 0.13 0.23 0.34 0.38 (Spacers are not used.)
Weight reduction for female rod end −0.02 −0.04 −0.04 −0.10 −0.20 −0.20 Note 2) The maximum manufacturable stroke shows the long stroke.
With End Lock

Note 3) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage.

Calculation (Example) CG1KWLN32-100Z 앫Basic weight ··················0.49 (Foot, ø 32)
CBG1

For details, refer to “Air Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the

(Foot, ø 32, 100 stroke) 앫Additional weight ········0.13/50 stroke products that exceed the standard stroke might not be able to fulfill
앫Air cylinder stroke·······100 stroke the specifications due to the deflection etc.
0.49 + 0.13 x 100/50 = 0.75 kg

Mounting Brackets/Part No.

Auto Switch

Mounting Order Bore size [mm]

Contents
bracket q’ty 20 25 32 40 50 63
2 foots,
Axial foot 2 Note) CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040 CG-L050 CG-L063
8 mounting bolts
1 flange,
Flange 1 CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040 CG-F050 CG-F063
Made to Order

4 mounting bolts
2 trunnion pins, 2 trunnion bolts,
Trunnion pin 1 CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040 CG-T050 CG-T063
2 flat washers

Pivot bracket 1 CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A CG-050-24A CG-063-24A 1 pivot bracket

Note) Order two foots per cylinder.

44
Series CG1KW

Construction

!0 t !1 u !4 q e o !3 r w i !2 y

ø 20 to ø 32

Component Parts Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

No. Description Material Note Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents
1 Rod cover A Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 20 CG1KWN20Z-PS
Set of the
2 Rod cover B Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 25 CG1KWN25Z-PS
nos.
32 CG1KWN32Z-PS
!1, !2, !3, !4
3 Cylinder tube Aluminium alloy Hard anodised
40 CG1KWN40Z-PS
4 Piston Aluminium alloy
Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on
Stainless steel ø 32 or smaller page 10 for Disassembly/Replacement.
5 Piston rod A
Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ ø 40 or larger Order with the kit number according to the
Stainless steel For ø 20 or ø 25 with built-in magnet bore size.
6 Piston rod B ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g).
Carbon steel∗∗ Hard chrome plating∗
Order with the following part number when only
7 Non-rotating guide Bearing alloy the grease pack is needed.
8 Bushing Bearing alloy Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
9 Bumper Resin
10 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated
11 Rod seal A NBR
12 Rod seal B NBR
13 Piston seal NBR
14 Tube gasket NBR
∗ The material is stainless steel for ø 20 to ø 32.
∗∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of stainless steel.
∗∗∗ For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston.

45
 Air Cylinder: Non-rotating Rod Type
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CG1KW

Double Acting, Single Rod

Basic with Rubber Bumper: CG1KWBN

CG1
Width across flats KB F GA 2 x RcP GA F Width across flats KA

MM H1 H1 MM
øD

øD
øI

Double Acting, Double Rod

øE−0.05
øE−0.05

0
0

CG1W
Standard
R0
4

Width across AL AL Width across

.
R0

.4
flats B1 A TA 4 x TC TA K A flats B1
H S + Stroke H + Stroke C 8xJ
ZZ + 2 Stroke NA

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1
[mm]

Bore size Stroke range A AL B1 C D DK E F GA H1 I J K KA KB MM NA P S

20 Up to 1500 18 15.5 13 14 8 9.2 12 2 12 5 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7 5 6 8 M8 x 1.25 24 1/8 77
25 Up to 1500 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 11 14 2 12 6 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5 5.5 8 10 M10 x 1.25 29 1/8 77

Double Acting, Single Rod

32 Up to 1500 22 19.5 17 20 12 12 18 2 12 6 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8 5.5 10 10 M10 x 1.25 35.5 1/8 79

CG1K
40 Up to 1500 30 27 19 26 16 16 25 2 13 8 47 M6 x 1 depth 12 6 14 14 M14 x 1.5 44 1/8 87
50 Up to 1500 35 32 27 32 20 20 30 2 14 11 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16 7 18 18 M18 x 1.5 55 1/4 102
63

Non-rotating Rod
Up to 1500 35 32 27 38 20 20 32 2 14 11 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16 7 18 18 M18 x 1.5 69 1/4 102

[mm]
Note 1) Dimensions are the same as those for the CG1W standard. Refer to page 29.

Double Acting, Double Rod

Bore size TA TC H ZZ

CG1KW
20 11 M5 x 0.8 35 147
25 11 M6 x 0.75 40 157
32 11 M8 x 1.0 40 159
40 12 M10 x 1.25 50 187
50 13 M12 x 1.25 58 218

Double Acting, Single Rod

63 13 M14 x 1.5 58 218

Direct Mount

CG1R
Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling. Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website,

CG1KR
http://www.smc.eu
∗ Caution on handling/disassembly is provided in addition to that shown below. Refer to page 10.
Handling/Disassembly
Caution
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that 2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.
With End Lock

rotational torque would be applied to the piston rod.

CBG1

Air leakage may be happened, depending on the position in which

¡If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will become a rod seal is fitted. Thus, please contact SMC when replacing
deformed, thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy. Refer to the them.
table below for the approximate values of the allowable range of
rotational torque.
Allowable rotational torque ø 20 ø 25, ø 32 ø 40, ø 50, ø 63
Auto Switch

(N·m or less) 0.2 0.25 0.44

¡To screw a bracket or a nut onto the piston rod, make sure to
retract the piston rod entirely, and place a wrench over the flat
portion of the rod that protrudes. Tighten it by giving consideration
to prevent the tightening torque from being applied to the non-
rotating guide.
Made to Order

46
 Air Cylinder: Direct Mount Type
Double Acting

Series CG1R
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63
How to Order

CG1R N 25 100 Z
With auto switch CDG1R N 25 100 Z M9BW
With auto switch (Built-in magnet)
Number of auto
Type switches
N Rubber bumper Rod end bracket
Bore size — 2 pcs.
A Air cushion — None S 1 pc.
20 20 mm V Single knuckle joint
n “n” pcs.
25 25 mm W Double knuckle joint
32 32 mm ∗ No bracket is provided for the female
40 40 mm rod end. Auto switch
50 50 mm ∗ Rod end bracket is shipped together — Without auto switch
63 63 mm with the product, but not assembled.
∗ A knuckle joint pin is not provided with ∗ For applicable auto switches,
the single knuckle joint. refer to the table below.
Cylinder stroke [mm]
Refer to “Standard Strokes” on page 48.
Rod end thread
— Male rod end Made to Order
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model F Female rod end For details, refer to page 48.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required,
there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch.
(Example) CDG1RA32-100Z

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for further information on auto switches.
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]

Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 63
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N     —  IC
5 V, 12 V
Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P     —  circuit
Solid state auto switch

———
M9BV M9B     — 
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C  —    —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW     —  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW     —  circuit
(2-colour indication) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW     —  —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗     —  IC
Water resistant 5 V, 12 V
(2-colour indication)
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗     —  circuit
2-wire 12 V M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗     —  —
Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF  —   —  IC circuit
3-wire IC
— 5V — A96V A96  —  — — — —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN) circuit
Reed auto switch

100 V A93V A93  —   — — —

Grommet
No 100 V or less A90V A90  —  — — — IC circuit
———
Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —
PLC
Yes — — C73C  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m·················· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
1 m·················· M (Example) M9NWM
3 m·················· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m·················· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None··············· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only the auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)

47
 Air Cylinder: Direct Mount Type
Double Acting Series CG1R

Double Acting, Single Rod

Specifications
The CG1R direct mount cylinder

CG1
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63
can be installed directly through
Action Double acting, Single rod
the use of a square rod cover. Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air

Double Acting, Double Rod

Space-saving has been realized. Proof pressure 1.5 MPa

CG1W
Standard
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Because it is a directly mounted style without
using brackets, its overall length is shorter, Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
and its installation pitch can be made smaller. Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C
Thus, the space that is required for (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch : –10 °C to 60 °C
installation has been dramatically reduced.
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

+1.4
Stroke length tolerance Up to 300 st 0 mm

CG1
Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion

Standard Strokes

Double Acting, Single Rod

[mm]
Standard stroke∗

CG1K
Symbol Bore size
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
Rubber bumper
25, 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200

Non-rotating Rod
40, 50, 63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
∗ Please consult with SMC for strokes which exceed the standard stroke length.

Double Acting, Double Rod

Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order.

CG1KW
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Note 2) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to “Air
Air cushion
Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the products that exceed the standard stroke
might not be able to fulfill the specifications due to the deflection etc.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount
Tightening Torque: Tighten the cylinder mounting bolts with the following tightening torque.

CG1R
Made to Order
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.)
Bore size [mm] Hexagon socket head cap screw size Tightening torque [N·m]
Symbol Specifications
20 M5 x 0.8 2.4 to 3.6
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
25 M6 4.2 to 6.2

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

-XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (−10 to 150 °C)∗2
32 M8 10.0 to 15.0
Cold resistant cylinder (−40 to 70 °C)∗1, ∗3

CG1KR
-XB7
-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)∗1, ∗3
40 M10 19.6 to 29.4

-XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)∗1, ∗3 50 M12 33.6 to 50.4

-XC6 Made of stainless steel 63 M16 84.8 to 127.2
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type∗1
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type∗1
Auto switch rail mounting∗1
With End Lock

-XC13
Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly
CBG1

-XC20 Head cover axial port∗1

-XC22 Fluororubber seal
-XC85 Grease for food processing equipment
Cylinder model: CDG1RN20-100Z-W-M9BW
∗1 Only compatible with cylinders with rubber bumper.
∗2 Cylinders with rubber bumper have no bumper.
∗3 The shape is the same as the existing product.
Auto Switch

Use the existing seal kit.

Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with

Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint Auto switch
auto switches.
Auto switch D-M9BW: 2 pcs.
• Auto switch proper mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting ∗ Double knuckle joint and auto switch are
Made to Order

height shipped together with the product, but not Double knuckle joint
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting assembled.
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no.
• Operating range
• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/
Auto switch mounting surfaces
48
Series CG1R

Weights Accessories
[kg]
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 Mounting Basic
Basic weight 0.14 0.23 0.35 0.57 1.04 1.49 Standard Rod end nut 
Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22 Single knuckle joint 
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26
Option Double knuckle joint∗
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.14 0.21 0.25 
(with pin)
Additional weight with air cushion 0 0.01 0.04 0 0.01 0.04
Weight reduction for female rod end −0.01 −0.02 −0.02 −0.05 −0.10 −0.10 ∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are
shipped together.
Calculation (Example) CG1RN32-100Z 앫Basic weight ··············· 0.35
(ø 32, 100 stroke) 앫Additional weight ········ 0.09/50 stroke
앫Air cylinder stroke······· 100 stroke
0.35 + 0.09 x 100/50 = 0.53 kg

Precautions
Be sure to read this before handling.
Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions, refer to “Handling Precau-
tions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website, http://www.smc.eu

∗ Caution on handling/disassembly is provided in addition to that shown below. Refer to page 10.

Handling/Disassembly
Caution
When a cylinder is operated with one end fixed and the other free, a bending moment may act on the cylinder due to
vibration generated at the stroke end, which can damage the cylinder. In such a case, install a mounting bracket to
suppress the vibration of the cylinder body or reduce the piston speed so that the cylinder does not vibrate. Also, use a
mounting bracket when moving the cylinder body or when a long stroke cylinder is mounted horizontally and fixed at
one end.

49
 Air Cylinder: Direct Mount Type
Double Acting Series CG1R

Double Acting, Single Rod

Construction

CG1
With rubber bumper
o r !7 t !9 qy w e !8 iu

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
CG1
With air cushion

!4 o r !7 t q !9 !5 w !0 e !8 i !2 !6 !1 @0 !3

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
Double Acting, Single Rod
Direct Mount

CG1R
Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 11 Cushion ring B Aluminium alloy
2 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 12 Seal retainer Rolled steel Zinc chromated
With End Lock

3 Piston Aluminium alloy ø 40 or smaller Carbon steel Electroless nickel plating

CBG1

Cushion
13
Stainless steel For ø 20 or ø 25 with built-in magnet valve ø 50 or larger Steel wire Zinc chromated
4 Piston rod
Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ 14 Steel ball Carbon steel
5 Bushing Bearing alloy 15 Cushion seal A Urethane ø 32 or larger is
6 Bumper Resin ø 32 or larger is 16 Cushion seal B Urethane common.
7 Bumper Resin common. 17 Rod seal NBR
Auto Switch

8 Wear ring Resin 18 Piston seal NBR

9 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated 19 Tube gasket NBR
10 Cushion ring A Aluminium alloy 20 Valve seal NBR
Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston.
∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of
stainless steel.
Made to Order

Replacement parts/Seal kit are the same as standard type, double

acting, single rod. Refer to page 11.

Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on page 10 for

Disassembly/Replacement.
50
Series CG1R

Basic with Bottom Mounting

With rubber bumper

X
GA 2 x RcP GB 2 x øLD
Width across flats KA H1
.4
MM R0

øD

øI

øE−0.05
0

L
LH
Width across
flats B1
AL Y
A N LX
K L
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke

With air cushion

WA 2xP

Wθ° GA Cushion valve, WB 2 x øLD

10°
X Width across flats WH GB WC
Width across flats KA H1
.4
MM R0
øD

øI

øE−0.05
0

L
LH
Width across
flats B1
AL Y
NA A N LX
K L
H S + Stroke F
ZZ + Stroke

Port location WD
Female rod end
MM
X Effective depth A1

ø 20, ø 25
H
ZZ + Stroke

[mm]
Stroke
Bore size
range
A AL B1 D E F GA GB H H1 I K KA L LD LH LX MM N P S X Y ZZ
20 Up to 150 18 15.5 13 8 12 2 20 10 27 5 26 5 6 30.4 ø 5.5, ø 9.5 depth of counterbore 6 15 18 M8 x 1.25 27 1/8 75 38 11 104
25 Up to 200 22 19.5 17 10 14 2 22 10 32 6 31 5.5 8 36.4 ø 6.6, ø 11 depth of counterbore 7 18 22 M10 x 1.25 29 1/8 77 44 12 111
32 Up to 200 22 19.5 17 12 18 2 26 10 32 6 38 5.5 10 42.4 ø 9, ø 14 depth of counterbore 9 21 24 M10 x 1.25 33 1/8 83 45 13 117
40 Up to 300 30 27 19 16 25 2 30 10 39 8 47 6 14 52.4 ø 11, ø 17.5 depth of counterbore 12 26 32 M14 x 1.5 37 1/8 94 55 16 135
50 Up to 300 35 32 27 20 30 2 33 12 45 11 58 7 18 64.5 ø 14, ø 20 depth of counterbore 14 32 41 M18 x 1.5 44 1/4 108 62 17 155
63 Up to 300 35 32 27 20 32 2 39 12 45 11 72 7 18 76.6 ø 18, ø 26 depth of counterbore 18 38 46 M18 x 1.5 50 1/4 114 64 19 161

With Air Cushion [mm] Female Rod End [mm]

Stroke
Bore size
range
P WA WB WC WD Wθ WH Bore size A1 H MM X ZZ
20 Up to 150 M5 x 0.8 22 15 5.5 2 25° 1.5 20 8 13 M4 x 0.7 24 90
25 Up to 200 M5 x 0.8 24 14.5 7 2 25° 1.5 25 8 14 M5 x 0.8 26 93
32 Up to 200 Rc1/8 28 14 11.5 — 25° 1.5 32 12 14 M6 x 1 27 99
40 Up to 300 Rc1/8 32 15 15 — 20° 1.5 40 13 15 M8 x 1.25 31 111
50 Up to 300 Rc1/4 36 16 17.5 — 20° 3 50 18 16 M10 x 1.5 33 126
63 Up to 300 Rc1/4 42 17 20.5 — 20° 3 63 18 16 M10 x 1.5 35 132
51
 Air Cylinder: Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod Type

Series CG1KR

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63
How to Order

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
CG1KRN 25 100 Z
With auto switch CDG1KRN 25 100 Z M9BW

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1
With auto switch
(Built-in magnet) Rod end thread Number of
— Male rod end auto switches
Non-rotating rod type
F Female rod end — 2 pcs.

Double Acting, Single Rod

S 1 pc.
Mounting Rod end bracket n “n” pcs.

CG1K
N Rubber bumper — None
Note) Air cushion type “CG1KRA” is V Single knuckle joint

Non-rotating Rod
a Made-to-Order product.
W Double knuckle joint Auto switch
∗ No bracket is provided for the — Without auto switch
Bore size female rod end. ∗ For applicable auto switches,

Double Acting, Double Rod

∗ Rod end bracket is shipped refer to the table below.
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model 20 20 mm together with the product, but not

CG1KW
assembled.
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto 25 25 mm
∗ A knuckle joint pin is not provided Made to Order
switch is required, there is no need to enter 32 32 mm with the single knuckle joint. Refer to page 53 for details.
the symbol for the auto switch. 40 40 mm
(Example) CDG1KRN32-100Z 50 50 mm Cylinder stroke [mm]
63 63 mm Refer to “Standard Strokes” on page 53.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount
Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for further information on auto switches.

CG1R
Indicator light

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)

Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 63
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line
3-wire (NPN) M9NV M9N     —  IC
5 V, 12 V

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Grommet 3-wire (PNP) M9PV M9P     —  circuit
Solid state auto switch

———
    

CG1KR
M9BV M9B —
2-wire 12 V —
Connector — H7C  —    —
3-wire (NPN) M9NWV M9NW     —  IC
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V Relay,
Yes 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — M9PWV M9PW     —  circuit
(2-colour indication) PLC
2-wire 12 V M9BWV M9BW     —  —
Grommet 3-wire (NPN) M9NAV∗∗ M9NA∗∗     —  IC
Water resistant 5 V, 12 V
(2-colour indication)
3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗     —  circuit
M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗     
With End Lock

2-wire 12 V — —
CBG1

Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF  —   —  IC circuit

3-wire IC
— 5V — A96V A96  —  — — — —
Yes (Equiv. to NPN) circuit
Reed auto switch

100 V A93V A93  —   — — —

Grommet
No 100 V or less A90V A90  —  — — — IC circuit
———
Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
12 V Relay,
Auto Switch

No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —

PLC
Yes — — C73C  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
Made to Order

1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM

3 m ·········· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m ·········· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None ·········· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)

52
Series CG1KR
Specifications
Series CG1KR direct mount,
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63
non-rotating rod type cylinder Action Double acting, Single rod
can be installed directly through Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
the use of a square rod cover. Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Space-saving has been realized. Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C
Because it is a directly mounted style without (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch : –10 °C to 60 °C
using brackets, its overall length is shorter, Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s
and its installation pitch can be made smaller. +1.4
Stroke length tolerance Up to 300 st 0 mm
Thus, the space that is required for installation
has been dramatically reduced. Cushion Rubber bumper
Rod non-rotating accuracy ±1° ±0.8° ±0.5°

Weights
[kg]
Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63
Basic weight 0.14 0.24 0.35 0.56 1.04 1.48
Single knuckle joint 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.10 0.22 0.22
Double knuckle joint (with pin) 0.05 0.09 0.09 0.13 0.26 0.26
Additional weight per 50 mm of stroke 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.15 0.22 0.26
Weight reduction for female rod end −0.01 −0.02 −0.02 −0.05 −0.10 −0.10
Calculation (Example) CG1KRN32-100Z 앫Basic weight ················ 0.35
(ø 32, 100 stroke) 앫Additional weight ········· 0.09/50 stroke
Symbol Rubber bumper 앫Air cylinder stroke········ 100 stroke
0.35 + 0.09 x 100/50 = 0.53 kg
Standard Strokes
[mm]
Bore size Standard stroke∗
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150
25, 32 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
Made to Order 40, 50, 63 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.) ∗ Please consult with SMC for strokes which exceed the standard stroke length.
Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order.
Symbol Specifications
Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type∗1 Note 2) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to “Air
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type∗1 Cylinders Model Selection”. In addition, the products that exceed the standard stroke
might not be able to fulfill the specifications due to the deflection etc.
-XC20 Head cover axial port
∗1 The shape is the same as the existing product.
Use the existing seal kit. Tightening Torque: Tighten the cylinder mounting bolts with the following tightening torque.
Accessories Bore size [mm] Hexagon socket head cap screw size Tightening torque [N·m]
20 M5 x 0.8 2.4 to 3.6
Mounting Basic 25 M6 4.2 to 6.2
Standard Rod end nut  32 M8 10.0 to 15.0
Single knuckle joint  40 M10 19.6 to 29.4
Option Double knuckle joint∗ 50 M12 33.6 to 50.4

(with pin) 63 M16 84.8 to 127.2
∗ A double knuckle joint pin and retaining rings are
shipped together. Ordering Example of Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder model: CDG1KRN20-100Z-W-M9BW

Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with
auto switches.
• Auto switch proper mounting position
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting
height
Rod end bracket W: Double knuckle joint Auto switch
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no. Auto switch D-M9BW: 2 pcs.
• Operating range
∗ Double knuckle joint and auto switch are
• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/ shipped together with the product, but not Double knuckle joint
Auto switch mounting surfaces assembled.

53
 Air Cylinder: Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod Type Series CG1KR

Construction

Double Acting, Single Rod

Non-rotating rod type/

CG1
Bottom mounting style
!0 r !1 t !3 q w u !2 e o i

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
y t

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1
Double Acting, Single Rod
ø 20 to ø 32
Component Parts

CG1K
No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Clear hard anodised

Non-rotating Rod
2 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Clear hard anodised
3 Piston Aluminium alloy

Double Acting, Double Rod

ø 20 to ø 32 Stainless steel
4 Piston rod

CG1KW
ø 40 to ø 63 Carbon steel Hard chrome plating
5 Non-rotating guide Oil-impregnated sintered alloy
6 Bushing Oil-impregnated sintered alloy ø 20 to ø 32 only
7 Bumper Resin
8 Bumper Resin
9 Wear ring Resin Replacement parts/Seal kit are the same as

Double Acting, Single Rod

10 Rod end nut Rolled steel Zinc chromated

Direct Mount
double acting, non-rotating rod type. Refer to

CG1R
11 Rod seal NBR page 41.
12 Piston seal NBR
Note) Refer to the Specific Product Precautions on
13 Tube gasket NBR page 10 for Disassembly/Replacement.

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Precautions
CG1KR
Be sure to read this before handling. Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions. For Actuator and Auto Switch
Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website,
http://www.smc.eu

Handling/Disassembly
With End Lock

CBG1

Caution
When a cylinder is operated with one end fixed and the ¡To screw a bracket or a nut onto the piston rod, make sure to retract the
other free, a bending moment may act on the cylinder piston rod entirely, and place a wrench over the flat portion of the rod that
due to vibration generated at the stroke end, which can protrudes. Tighten it by giving consideration to prevent the tightening
damage the cylinder. In such a case, install a mounting torque from being applied to the non-rotating guide.
bracket to suppress the vibration of the cylinder body or
Auto Switch

reduce the piston speed so that the cylinder does not

vibrate. Also, use a mounting bracket when moving the
cylinder body or when a long stroke cylinder is mounted
horizontally and fixed at one end.
1. Avoid using the air cylinder in such a way that
rotational torque would be applied to the piston rod.
Made to Order

¡If rotational torque is applied, the non-rotating guide will become deformed,
thus affecting the non-rotating accuracy. Refer to the table below for the 2. When replacing rod seals, please contact SMC.
approximate values of the allowable range of rotational torque. Air leakage may be happened, depending on the position in which a
Allowable rotational torque ø 20 ø 25, ø 32 ø 40, ø 50, ø 63 rod seal is fitted. Thus, please contact SMC when replacing them.
(N·m or less) 0.2 0.25 0.44
54
Series CG1KR

Basic with Bottom Mounting: CG1KRN

With rubber bumper

X
Width across GA 2 x RcP 2 x øLD
GB
flats KA
MM H1 .4
R0
øD

øE–0.05
0
øI

L
LH
Width across AL Y
flats B1 A N
H S + Stroke F LX
ZZ + Stroke L

Female rod end

MM
X
Effective depth A1

H
ZZ + Stroke

Female Rod End [mm]

Bore size
[mm]
A1 H MM X ZZ
20 8 13 M4 x 0.7 24 90
25 8 14 M5 x 0.8 26 93
32 12 14 M6 x 1 27 99
40 13 15 M8 x 1.25 31 111
50 18 16 M10 x 1.5 33 126
63 18 16 M10 x 1.5 35 132

[mm]
Bore size Stroke range
[mm] [mm]
A AL B1 D E F GA GB H H1 I KA L LD LH LX MM N P S X Y ZZ
20 Up to 150 18 15.5 13 9.2 12 2 20 10 27 5 26 8 30.4 ø 5.5, ø 9.5 depth of counterbore 6 15 18 M8 x 1.25 27 1/8 75 38 11 104
25 Up to 200 22 19.5 17 11 14 2 22 10 32 6 31 10 36.4 ø 6.6, ø 11 depth of counterbore 7 18 22 M10 x 1.25 29 1/8 77 44 12 111
32 Up to 200 22 19.5 17 12 18 2 26 10 32 6 38 10 42.4 ø 9, ø 14 depth of counterbore 9 21 24 M10 x 1.25 33 1/8 83 45 13 117
40 Up to 300 30 27 19 16 25 2 30 10 39 8 47 14 52.4 ø 11, ø 17.5 depth of counterbore 12 26 32 M14 x 1.5 37 1/8 94 55 16 135
50 Up to 300 35 32 27 20 30 2 33 12 45 11 58 18 64.5 ø 14, ø 20 depth of counterbore 14 32 41 M18 x 1.5 44 1/4 108 62 17 155
63 Up to 300 35 32 27 20 32 2 39 12 45 11 72 18 76.6 ø 18, ø 26 depth of counterbore 18 38 46 M18 x 1.5 50 1/4 114 64 19 161
Auto switch mounting position is the same as that on page 70.

55
 Air Cylinder: With End Lock

Series CBG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
ø 20, ø 25, ø 32, ø 40, ø 50, ø 63, ø 80, ø 100
How to Order

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1W
Standard
CBG1 L N 25 100 H N
CDBG1 L N 25 100 H N M9BW C

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

With auto switch

CG1
(Built-in magnet)
Manual release Number of
Mounting Type auto switches
B Basic N Rubber bumper N Non-locking type
— 2 pcs.
L Axial foot A Air cushion L Locking type
S 1 pc.
F Rod flange n “n” pcs.
Bore size

Double Acting, Single Rod

G Head flange Lock position
U∗ Rod trunnion 20 20 mm 50 50 mm Auto switch
H Head end lock

CG1K
T∗ Head trunnion 25 25 mm 63 63 mm
R Rod end lock
— Without auto switch
D Clevis 32 32 mm 80 80 mm ∗ For applicable auto switches,
W Double end lock
∗ Not available for bore size ø 80 and ø 100. 40 40 mm 100 100 mm refer to the table below.

Non-rotating Rod
Besides, trunnion cannot be attached in
the side to which an end lock is attached. Cylinder stroke [mm] With rod boot Auto switch mounting bracket Note)
Note) Mounting brackets are shipped Refer to “Standard Strokes” Note) This symbol is indicated when the
— Without rod boot

Double Acting, Double Rod

together, (but not assembled). on page 57. D-A9쏔 or M9쏔 type auto switch is
J Nylon tarpaulin specified.This mounting bracket

CG1KW
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model K Heat resistant tarpaulin does not apply to other auto switch-
∗ In the case of w/rod boot, and a foot es (D-C7쏔 and H7쏔, etc.) (—)
If a built-in magnet cylinder without an auto switch is required,
bracket or rod side flange as a bracket,
there is no need to enter the symbol for the auto switch. those parts are to be assembled at the Made to Order
(Example) CDBG1FA32-100-RL time of shipment. Refer to page 57 for details.

Applicable Auto Switches/Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for further information on auto switches.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Load voltage Auto switch model Lead wire length [m]
Indicator light

Direct Mount
Electrical Wiring Applicable bore size Pre-wired
Type Special function 0.5 1 3 5 None connector Applicable load

CG1R
entry (Output) DC AC ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100
(—) (M) (L) (Z) (N)
Perpendicular In-line In-line
3-wire M9NV M9N —     — 
(NPN) — — G59  —   —  IC
5 V, 12 V
3-wire M9PV M9P —     —  circuit
Grommet
——— (PNP) — — G5P  —   — 
M9BV M9B —     — 

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Solid state auto switch

2-wire 12 V — — K59  —   —  —

CG1KR
Connector — H7C —  —    —
3-wire M9NWV M9NW —     — 
(NPN) — — G59W  —   —  IC Relay,
Yes 24 V 5 V, 12 V —
Diagnostic indication 3-wire M9PWV M9PW —     —  circuit PLC
(2-colour indication) (PNP) — — G5PW  —   — 
M9BWV M9BW —     — 
2-wire 12 V —
Grommet — — K59W  —   — 
3-wire (NPN) M9NAV ∗∗ M9NA ∗∗ —     — 
With End Lock

5 V, 12 V IC circuit
Water resistant 3-wire (PNP) M9PAV∗∗ M9PA∗∗ —     — 
CBG1

(2-colour indication) M9BAV∗∗ M9BA∗∗ —     — 

2-wire 12 V —
— — G5BA∗∗ — —   — 
Diagnostic output (2-colour indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — H7NF —  —   —  IC circuit
3-wire (Equiv. to NPN) — 5V — A96V A96 —  —  — — — IC circuit —
Yes
Reed auto switch

100 V A93V A93 —  —   — — —

Grommet No 100 V or less A90V A90 —  —  — — — IC circuit
——— Yes 100 V, 200 V — B54  —   — —
Auto Switch

12 V Relay,
No 2-wire 24 V 200 V or less — B64  —  — — — —
PLC
Yes — — C73C —  —    —
Connector
No 24 V or less — C80C —  —    — IC circuit
Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) Grommet Yes — — — B59W  —  — — — —
∗∗ Water resistant type auto switches can be mounted on the above models, but in such case SMC cannot guarantee water resistance.
Please consult with SMC regarding water resistant types with the above model numbers.
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· — (Example) M9NW ∗ Solid state auto switches marked with “쑗” are produced upon receipt of order.
Made to Order

1 m ·········· M (Example) M9NWM

3 m ·········· L (Example) M9NWL
5 m ·········· Z (Example) M9NWZ
None ·········· N (Example) H7CN
∗ Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed above, refer to page 74 for details.
∗ For details about auto switches with pre-wired connector, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ The D-A9쏔쏔/M9쏔쏔쏔 auto switches are shipped together, (but not assembled). (However, only auto switch mounting brackets are assembled before shipment.)

56
Series CBG1

Specifications

Bore size [mm] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

Action Double acting, Single rod
Lubricant Not required (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.15 MPa∗
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –10 to 70 °C (No freezing)
temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60 °C (No freezing)
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 50 to 700 mm/s
st + 1.4
Up to 1000 mm
Symbol Stroke length tolerance Up to 1000 st + 1.4
0 mm, Up to 1200
st + 1.8
0 mm
0
st + 1.8
Up to 1500 0 mm
Rubber bumper Cushion Rubber bumper, Air cushion
Basic, Axial foot, Rod flange, Head flange,
Mounting ∗∗ Rod trunnion, Head trunnion,
Clevis (used for changing the port location by 90°)
∗ 0.05 MPa except locking parts.
∗∗ Rod/Head trunnion types are not available for ø 80 and ø 100.
Trunnion is not attached for a cover on which lock mechanism is equipped.
Air cushion
Lock Specifications

Lock position Head end, Rod end, Double end

Holding force ø 20 ø 25 ø 32 ø 40 ø 50 ø 63 ø 80 ø 100
(Max.) [N] 215 330 550 860 1340 2140 3450 5390
Backlash 2 mm or less
Manual release Non-locking type, Locking type
Adjust the switch position so that it operates upon movement to both the stroke end and backlash
Made to Order (2 mm) positions.
(For details, refer to pages 77 to 93.)

Symbol Specifications
Standard Strokes
-XA쏔 Change of rod end shape
-XC13 Auto switch rail mounting Maximum
Bore size Long stroke manufacturable
Standard stroke [mm] Note 1) stroke
[mm] [mm]
[mm]
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 201 to 350
25 301 to 400
Refer to pages 68 to 74 for cylinders with 32 301 to 450
auto switches. 40 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 301 to 800 1500
• Auto switch proper mounting position 50, 63 150, 200, 250, 300 301 to 1200
(detection at stroke end) and its mounting 80 301 to 1400
height
• Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting
100 301 to 1500
• Auto switch mounting brackets/Part no. Note 1) Manufacture of intermediate strokes at 1 mm intervals is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
• Operating range Note 2) Note 2) Long stroke applies to the axial foot style and the rod side flange style. If other
• Cylinder mounting bracket, by stroke/ mounting brackets are used, or the length exceeds the long stroke limit, the stroke should
Auto switch mounting surfaces be determined based on the stroke selection table in the technical data.

Rod Boot Material

Symbol Rod boot material Maximum operating

temperature
J Nylon tarpaulin 70 °C
K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110 °C∗
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod
boot itself.

57
 Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series CBG1

Construction: With Rubber Bumper

Double Acting, Single Rod

Head end lock

CG1
ø 80, ø 100 ø 80, ø 100
!9 @0
Non-locking type manual release: Suffix N Locking type manual release: Suffix L

Double Acting, Double Rod

!7 !6 !5 !8 K

CG1W
Standard
!2 @4 y @5 q u @7 r !9 @9 @2 @6 t @3 @0 @1 @8 K !4 !0 !1 i o w

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1
Double Acting, Single Rod
Rod end lock
e w

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
Long stroke
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note

Double Acting, Single Rod

1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 15 M/O knob Zinc die-casted Black painted

Direct Mount
2 Head cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 16 M/O bolt Alloy steel Black zinc chromated, Red painted

CG1R
3 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 17 M/O spring Steel wire Zinc chromated
4 Cylinder tube Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 18 Stopper ring Carbon steel Zinc chromated
5 Piston Aluminium alloy Chromated 19 Bumper A Resin
6 Piston rod Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ 20 Bumper B Resin ø 40 or larger: Same as bumper A
7 Bushing Bearing alloy 21 Retaining ring Stainless steel Not available for ø 80, ø 100
8 Lock piston Carbon steel Hard chrome plating, Heat treated 22 Piston gasket NBR

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

9 Lock bushing Copper alloy 23 Wear ring Resin

CG1KR
10 Lock spring Stainless steel 24 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated
11 Bumper Resin 25 Rod seal NBR
12 Hexagon socket head cap screw Alloy steel Black zinc chromated 26 Piston seal NBR
13A Cap A Aluminium die-casted Black painted 27 Cylinder tube gasket NBR 1 pc. when using tube cover
13B Cap B Carbon steel Oxide film treated 28 Lock piston seal NBR 2 pcs. for double end lock
14 Rubber cap Synthetic rubber 29 Piston holder Resin ø 40 to ø 100, head end lock only
Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston.
With End Lock

∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of stainless steel.
CBG1

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

(With one end lock) (With double end lock)
Series Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents Series Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents
20 CBG1N20-PS 20 CBG1N20-PS-W
CBG1쏔N Set of the nos. CBG1쏔N Set of the nos.
25 CBG1N25-PS 25 CBG1N25-PS-W
@5, @6, @7, @8 @5, @6, @7, @8
Auto Switch

Rubber bumper Rubber bumper

type 32 CBG1N32-PS and grease pack type 32 CBG1N32-PS-W and grease pack
40 CBG1N40-PS 40 CBG1N40-PS-W
Order seal kit in accordance with the bore size. Order seal kit in accordance with the bore size.
∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). Order with the following part ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). Order with the following part
number when only the grease pack is needed. number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g) Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)
Made to Order

Caution
When disassembling cylinders with bore sizes of ø 20 through ø 40, grip the double flat part of either the tube cover or the rod cover with a vise
and loosen the other side with a wrench or a monkey wrench etc., and then remove the cover. When re-tightening, tighten approximately 2
degrees more than the original position. (Cylinders with ø 50 or larger bore sizes are tightened with a large tightening torque and cannot be
disassembled. If disassembly is required, please contact SMC.)
58
Series CBG1

Construction: With Air Cushion

With air cushion
Head end lock
@4 y @5 q u @7 #6 r #8 #0 @9 @2 @6 t @3 #7 #1 #9 @8 K !4 !0 !1 i o w !2

$0
#4
#3
#5
Non-locking type manual release: Suffix N $1

Rod end lock e #2 w

Long stroke
Component Parts
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material Note
1 Rod cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 22 Piston gasket NBR
2 Head cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 23 Wear ring Resin
3 Tube cover Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 24 Rod end nut Carbon steel Zinc chromated
4 Cylinder tube Aluminium alloy Hard anodised 25 Rod seal NBR
5 Piston Aluminium alloy Chromated 26 Piston seal NBR
6 Piston rod Carbon steel∗ Hard chrome plating∗ 27 Cylinder tube gasket NBR 1 pc. when using tube cover
7 Bushing Bearing alloy 28 Lock piston seal NBR 2 pcs. for double end lock
8 Lock piston Carbon steel Hard chrome plating, Heat treated 29 Piston holder Resin ø 40 to ø 100 only
9 Lock bushing Copper alloy 30 Cushion ring A Aluminium alloy Anodised
10 Lock spring Stainless steel 31 Cushion ring B Aluminium alloy Anodised
11 Bumper Resin 32 Seal retainer Rolled steel Only when using nickel plating, tube cover
12 Hexagon socket head cap screw Alloy steel Black zinc chromated 33 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plating
13A Cap A Aluminium die-casted Black painted 34 Valve retainer Rolled steel Electroless nickel plating
13B Cap B Carbon steel Oxide film treated 35 Lock nut Rolled steel Nickel plating
14 Rubber cap Synthetic rubber 36 Cushion seal A Urethane
15 M/O knob Zinc die-casted Black painted 37 Cushion seal B Urethane ø 32 or larger: Same as A
16 M/O bolt Alloy steel Black zinc chromated, Red painted 38 Cushion ring gasket A NBR
17 M/O spring Steel wire Zinc chromated 39 Cushion ring gasket B NBR ø 32 or larger: Same as A
18 Stopper ring Carbon steel Zinc chromated 40 Valve seal NBR
Note) For cylinders with auto switches, the magnet is installed in the piston. 41 Valve retaining gasket NBR
∗ The material for ø 20, ø 25 cylinders with auto switches is made of stainless steel.

Replacement Parts: Seal Kit Replacement Parts: Seal Kit

(With one end lock) (With double end lock)
Series Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents Series Bore size [mm] Kit no. Contents
20 CBG1A20-PS Set of the nos. 20 CBG1A20-PS-W Set of the nos.
CBG1쏔A CBG1쏔A
25 CBG1A25-PS @5, @6, @7, @8, 25 CBG1A25-PS-W @5, @6, @7, @8,
Air cushion Air cushion
32 CBG1A32-PS $0, $1 32 CBG1A32-PS-W $0, $1
type type
40 CBG1A40-PS and grease pack 40 CBG1A40-PS-W and grease pack
Order seal kit in accordance with the bore size. Order seal kit in accordance with the bore size.
∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). Order with the following part ∗ The seal kit includes a grease pack (10 g). Order with the following part
number when only the grease pack is needed. number when only the grease pack is needed.
Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g) Grease pack part number: GR-S-010 (10 g)

Caution
When disassembling cylinders with bore sizes of ø 20 through ø 40, grip the double flat part of either the tube cover or the rod cover with a vise
and loosen the other side with a wrench or a monkey wrench etc., and then remove the cover. When re-tightening, tighten approximately 2
degrees more than the original position. (Cylinders with ø 50 or larger bore sizes are tightened with a large tightening torque and cannot be
disassembled. If disassembly is required, please contact SMC.)
59
 Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series CBG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Basic with Rubber Bumper: CBG1BN

CG1
Head end lock: CBG1BN Bore size Stroke H쏔

2 x TC Width across flats B1 GA 2 x RcP GB

MM H

Double Acting, Double Rod

øD

CG1W
øTD

Standard
øE–0.05

øE–0.05
øI
0

0
TE AL F

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

TG TF A K TA 2 x TC DL2
NA H S + Stroke F

CG1
ZZ + Stroke
TA cross section

Non-locking type manual release: Suffix N Locking type manual release: Suffix L

Double Acting, Single Rod

HR HN

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
øMO
øRF
C±0.1
WL

WL

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
KA
C±0.1
NA 8xJ

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
[mm]
Bore size Stroke
A AL B1 C D DL2 E F GA GB H H1 HR HN I J
[mm] range (Max.)
20 Up to 350 18 15.5 13 14 8 12.5 12 2 12 12 35 5 25.3 37 26 M4 x 0.7 depth 7
25 Up to 400 22 19.5 17 16.5 10 12.5 14 2 12 12 40 6 28.3 40 31 M5 x 0.8 depth 7.5
32 Up to 450 22 19.5 17 20 12 12 18 2 12 12 40 6 31.3 43 38 M5 x 0.8 depth 8

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

40 Up to 800 30 27 19 26 16 15 25 2 13 13 50 8 38.3 52.5 47 M6 x 1 depth 12

CG1KR
50 Up to 1200 35 32 27 32 20 16.5 30 2 14 14 58 11 44.5 58.5 58 M8 x 1.25 depth 16
63 Up to 1200 35 32 27 38 20 16.5 32 2 14 14 58 11 45 59 72 M10 x 1.5 depth 16
80 Up to 1400 40 37 32 50 25 19 40 3 20 20 71 13 53.5 68 89 M10 x 1.5 depth 22
100 Up to 1500 40 37 41 60 30 20 50 3 20 20 71 16 64.5 79 110 M12 x 1.75 depth 22

Bore size
K KA MM MO NA P RF S TA TC TD TE TF TG WL ZZ
With End Lock

[mm]
CBG1

+0.08
20 5 6 M8 x 1.25 15 24 1/8 11 81 11 M5 x 0.8 8 0 4 0.5 5.5 15 118
25 5.5 8 M10 x 1.25 15 29 1/8 11 81 11 M6 x 0.75 10+0.08
0 5 1 6.5 15 123
32 5.5 10 M10 x 1.25 15 35.5 1/8 11 81 11 M8 x 1.0 12+0.08
0 5.5 1 7.5 24 123
40 6 14 M14 x 1.5 19 44 1/8 11 92 12 M10 x 1.25 14+0.08
0 6 1.25 8.5 24 144
50 7 18 M18 x 1.5 19 55 1/4 11 107 13 M12 x 1.25 16+0.08
0 7.5 2 10 24 167
Auto Switch

63 7 18 M18 x 1.5 19 69 1/4 11 107 13 M14 x 1.5 18+0.08

0 11.5 3 14.5 24 167
80 10 22 M22 x 1.5 23 80 3/8 21 130 — — — — — — 40 204
100 10 26 M26 x 1.5 23 100 1/2 21 130 — — — — — — 40 204
Made to Order

60
Series CBG1

Basic with Rubber Bumper: CBG1BN

Rod end lock: CBG1BN Bore size Stroke R쏔

GB
[mm]
Bore size
[mm]
DL1 GB S TB ZZ
20 19.5 10 (12) 80 (88) 11 117 (125)
25 19.5 10 (12) 80 (88) 11 122 (130)
32 20 10 (12) 81 (89) 10 (11) 123 (131)
40 19 10 (13) 87 (96) 10 (12) 139 (148)
DL1 TB
50 23.5 12 (14) 102 (114) 12 (13) 162 (174)
S + Stroke
63 23.5 12 (14) 102 (114) 12 (13) 162 (174)
ZZ + Stroke
80 27 16 (20) 124 (138) — 198 (212)
100 30 16 (20) 124 (138) — 198 (212)
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

Double end lock: CBG1BN Bore size Stroke W쏔

[mm]
Bore size
[mm]
S ZZ
20 92 129
25 92 134
32 91 133
40 101 153
S + Stroke 50 119 179
ZZ + Stroke 63 119 179
80 146 220
100 146 220

With rod boot

8 l 8 8 l

l
øIJ
øIJ
øe

øe

JH

f f JW
h+l h+l
ZZ + l + Stroke ZZ + l + Stroke

ø 20 to ø 63 ø 80, ø 100

[mm]
Bore size JH JW Head end lock: -H쏔 Rod end lock: -R쏔 Double end lock: -W쏔
[mm]
e f h IJ l
(Reference) (Reference) ZZ ZZ ZZ
20 30 18 55 27 15.5 10.5 138 137 (145) 149
25 30 19 62 32 16.5 10.5 145 144 (152) 156
32 35 19 62 38 18.5 10.5 145 145 (153) 155
/4 stroke

40 35 19 70 48 21.5 10.5 164 159 (168) 173

50 40 19 78 59 24 10.5 187 182 (194) 199
63 40 20 78 72 24 10.5 187 182 (194) 199
1

80 52 10 80 59 — — 213 207 (221) 229

100 62 7 80 71 — — 213 207 (221) 229
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long strokes.
∗∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 20 mm.

61
 Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series CBG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Basic with Air Cushion: CBG1BA

CG1
Head end lock: CBG1BA Bore size Stroke H쏔
Rod end lock: CBG1BA Bore size Stroke R쏔

Double Acting, Double Rod

WA 2xP WB Wθ
10°

CG1W
Standard
H
x.W
Ma

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1
Head End Lock: -H쏔 [mm] Rod End Lock: -R쏔 [mm]

Double Acting, Single Rod

Bore size Bore size
[mm]
P WA WB WH Wθ [mm]
P WA WB WH Wθ

CG1K
20 M5 x 0.8 16 16 23 30° 20 M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 23 30°
25 M5 x 0.8 16 16 25 30° 25 M5 x 0.8 16 15 (16) 25 30°

Non-rotating Rod
32 Rc1/8 16 16 28.5 25° 32 Rc1/8 16 15 (16) 28.5 25°
40 Rc1/8 16 16 33 20° 40 Rc1/8 16 15 (16) 33 20°

Double Acting, Double Rod

50 Rc1/4 18 18 40.5 20° 50 Rc1/4 18 17 (18) 40.5 20°

CG1KW
63 Rc1/4 18 18 47.5 20° 63 Rc1/4 18 17 (18) 47.5 20°
80 Rc3/8 22 22 60.5 20° 80 Rc3/8 22 22 60.5 20°
100 Rc1/2 22 22 71 20° 100 Rc1/2 22 22 71 20°
∗ For dimensions other than listed above, refer to the dimensions ∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long strokes.
with rubber bumper. ∗∗ For dimensions other than the listed above, refer to the
dimensions with rubber bumper.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
With End Lock

CBG1
Auto Switch
Made to Order

62
Series CBG1

With Mounting Bracket (For dimensions other than listed below, refer to pages 60 to 62, 14 to 16.)

Axial foot: CBG1L쏔

LS + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

[mm]
Head end lock: -H쏔 Rod end lock: -R쏔 Double end lock: -W쏔
Bore size
[mm]
LS ZZ LS ZZ LS ZZ
— Without rod boot With rod boot — Without rod boot With rod boot — Without rod boot With rod boot
20 57 122 142 + l 56 (64) 121 (129) 141 (149) + l 68 133 153 + l
25 57 127.5 149.5 + l 56 (64) 126.5 (134.5) 148.5 (156.5) + l 68 138.5 160.5 + l
32 55 127.5 149.5 + l 55 (63) 127.5 (135.5) 149.5 (157.5) + l 65 137.5 159.5 + l
40 65 149 169 + l 60 (69) 144 (153) 164 (173) + l 74 158 178 + l
50 72 174.5 194.5 + l 67 (79) 169.5 (181.5) 189.5 (201.5) + l 84 186.5 206.5 + l
63 72 174.5 194.5 + l 67 (79) 169.5 (181.5) 189.5 (201.5) + l 84 186.5 206.5 + l
80 82 210.5 219.5 + l 76 (90) 204.5 (218.5) 213.5 (227.5) + l 98 226.5 235.5 + l
100 82 214 223 + l 76 (90) 208 (222) 217 (231) + l 98 230 239 + l
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

Rod flange: CBG1F쏔

Head flange: CBG1G쏔

ZZ + Stroke

[mm]
Head end lock: -H쏔 Rod end lock: -R쏔 Double end lock: -W쏔
Bore size
[mm]
ZZ (Head flange)
Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot
20 124 144 + l 123 143 + l 135 155 + l
25 130 152 + l 129 151 + l 141 163 + l
32 130 152 + l 130 152 + l 140 162 + l
40 152 172 + l 147 (156) 167 (176) + l 161 181 + l
50 176 196 + l 171 (183) 191 (203) + l 188 208 + l
63 176 196 + l 171 (183) 191 (203) + l 188 208 + l
80 215 224 + l 209 (223) 218 (232) + l 231 240 + l
100 218 227 + l 212 (226) 221 (235) + l 234 243 + l
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.
63
 Air Cylinder: With End Lock Series CBG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

With Mounting Bracket
Rod trunnion: CBG1U쏔

CG1
(Head end lock -H쏔 only)
[mm]
Rod end lock: -R쏔
Bore size
[mm]
Z (Head trunnion) ZZ (Head trunnion)

Double Acting, Double Rod

Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot
20 104 124 + l 117 137 + l

CG1W
Standard
25 109 131 + l 122 144 + l
32 111 133 + l 123 145 + l
40 127 (134) 147 (154) + l 139 (148) 159 (168) + l
Head trunnion: CBG1T쏔 50 148 (159) 168 (179) + l 162 (174) 182 (194) + l
(Rod end lock -R쏔 only) 63 148 (159) 168 (179) + l 162 (174) 182 (194) + l
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

CG1
Z + Stroke

Double Acting, Single Rod

ZZ + Stroke

CG1K
Clevis: CBG1D쏔

Non-rotating Rod
ø 20 to ø 63

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke

Clevis: CBG1D쏔

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount
ø 80, ø 100

CG1R
Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod
Z + Stroke

CG1KR
ZZ + Stroke
[mm]
Head end lock: -H쏔 Rod end lock: -R쏔
Bore size
[mm]
Z ZZ Z ZZ
Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot
20 130 150 + l 141 161 + l 129 149 + l 140 160 + l
25 137 159 + l 150 172 + l 136 158 + l 149 171 + l
With End Lock

CBG1

32 141 163 + l 156 178 + l 141 163 + l 156 178 + l

40 164 184 + l 182 202 + l 159 (168) 179 (188) + l 177 (186) 197 (206) + l
50 190 210 + l 210 230 + l 185 (197) 205 (217) + l 205 (217) 225 (237) + l
63 195 215 + l 217 237 + l 190 (202) 210 (222) + l 212 (224) 232 (244) + l
80 236 245 + l 254 263 + l 230 (244) 239 (253) + l 248 (262) 257 (277) + l
100 244 253 + l 266 275 + l 238 (252) 247 (261) + l 260 (274) 269 (283) + l
Auto Switch

Double end lock: -W쏔

Bore size
[mm]
Z ZZ
Without rod boot With rod boot Without rod boot With rod boot
20 141 161 + l 152 172 + l
25 148 170 + l 161 183 + l
32 151 173 + l 166 188 + l
Made to Order

40 173 193 + l 191 211 + l

50 202 222 + l 222 242 + l
63 207 227 + l 229 249 + l
80 252 261 + l 270 279 + l
100 260 269 + l 282 291 + l
∗ ( ): Denotes the dimensions for long stroke.
64
 Series CBG1
Specific Product Precautions 1
Be sure to read this before handling. Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions.
For Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC
Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website, http://www.smc.eu

Use the Recommended Pneumatic Circuit Handling

Caution Warning
• This is necessary for proper operation and release of 1. Do not operate the cushion valve in the fully closed
the lock. or fully opened state.
W Using it in the fully closed state will cause the cushion seal to
be damaged. Using it in the fully opened state will cause the
piston rod assembly or the cover to be damaged.
2. Operate within the specified cylinder speed.
Otherwise, cylinder and seal damage may occur.

Operating Pressure
Caution
1. Supply air pressure of 0.15 MPa or higher to the port on the lock
mechanism side, as it is necessary for releasing the lock.

Exhaust Speed
W
Caution
Head end lock Rod end lock 1. The lock will be engaged automatically if the pressure applied to the port
on the lock mechanism side falls to 0.05 MPa or less. In cases where the
Handling piping on the lock mechanism side is long and thin, or the speed
controller is separated at some distance from the cylinder port, the
Caution exhaust speed will be reduced. Take note that some time may be
1. Do not use 3 position solenoid valves. required for the lock to engage. In addition, clogging of a silencer
Avoid use in combination with 3 position solenoid valves mounted on the solenoid valve exhaust port can produce the same
(especially closed center metal seal types). If pressure is effect.
trapped in the port on the lock mechanism side, the cylinder
cannot be locked. Furthermore, even after being locked, the Relation to Cushion
lock may be released after some time, due to air leaking from
the solenoid valve and entering the cylinder.
Caution
2. Back pressure is required when releasing the lock. 1. When cushion valve at lock mechanism side is fully opened or
closed, piston rod may not be reached at stroke end. Thus, lock
Be sure air is supplied to the side of the cylinder without a lock
is not established. And when locking is done at cushion valve
mechanism, (side of the piston rod without lock for double end
fully closed, adjust cushion valve since lock may not be released.
lock), before starting up, as in the above figures. Otherwise, the
lock may not be released. (Refer to “Releasing the Lock”.)
Releasing the Lock
3. Release the lock when mounting or adjusting the cylinder.
If mounting or other work is performed when the cylinder is Warning
locked, the lock unit may be damaged. 1. Before releasing the lock, be sure to supply air to the side without a
4. Operate with a load ratio of 50 % or less. lock mechanism, so that there is no load applied to the lock
If the load ratio exceeds 50 %, this may cause problems such mechanism when it is released. (Refer to the recommended pneumatic
as failure of the lock to release, or damage to the lock unit. circuits.) If the lock is released when the port on the other side is in an
5. Do not operate multiple cylinders in synchronization. exhaust state, and with a load applied to the lock unit, the lock unit
Avoid applications in which two or more cylinders with end lock may be subjected to an excessive force and be damaged.
are synchronized to move one workpiece, as one of the Furthermore, sudden movement of the piston rod is very dangerous.
cylinder locks may not be able to release when required.
6. Use a speed controller with meter-out control. Disassembly/Replacement
Lock cannot be released occasionally by meter-in control. Caution
7. Be sure to operate completely to the cylinder stroke
1. Do not replace the bushings.
end on the side with the lock. The bushings are press-fit. To replace them, they must be
If the cylinder piston does not reach the end of the stroke, replaced together with the cover assembly.
locking and unlocking may not be possible. 2. To replace a seal, apply grease to the new seal before installing it.
8. Do not use the air cylinder as an air-hydro cylinder. If the cylinder is put into operation without applying grease to
This may result in oil leak. the seal, it could cause the seal to wear significantly, leading to
9. Install a rod boot without twisting. premature air leakage.
If the cylinder is installed with its bellows twisted, it could 3. Cylinders with ø 50 or larger bore sizes cannot be disassembled.
damage the bellows. When disassembling cylinders with bore sizes of ø 20 through ø
10. Adjust an auto switch position so that it operates for 40, grip the double flat part of either the tube cover or the rod cover
with a vise and loosen the other side with a wrench or a monkey
movement to both the stroke end and backlash (2 wrench etc., and then remove the cover. When re-tightening,
mm) positions. tighten approximately 2 degrees more than the original position.
When a 2-colour indication switch is adjusted for green (Cylinders with ø 50 or larger bore sizes are tightened with a large
indication at the stroke end, it may change to red for the tightening torque and cannot be disassembled. If disassembly is
backlash return, but this is not abnormal. required, please contact SMC.)
65
 Series CBG1
Specific Product Precautions 2
Be sure to read this before handling. Refer to the back cover for Safety Instructions.
For Actuator and Auto Switch Precautions, refer to “Handling Precautions for SMC

Double Acting, Single Rod

Products” and the Operation Manual on SMC website, http://www.smc.eu

CG1
Manual Release Working Principle
∗ The figures below are the same as those for Series CBA2.
Caution
쎲Head end lock (Rod end lock is the same.)

Double Acting, Double Rod

1. Non-locking type manual release
Insert the accessory bolt from the top of the rubber cap (it is not 1. When the piston rod is getting closer to the stroke end, the taper part (∗)

CG1W
Standard
necessary to remove the rubber cap), and after screwing it into the lock of the piston rod edge will push the lock piston up.
piston, pull it to release the lock. If you stop pulling the bolt, the lock will
return to an operational state. Spring
Thread sizes, pulling forces and strokes are as shown below. Lock piston
Bore size [mm] Thread size Pulling force Stroke [mm]

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

20, 25, 32 M2.5 x 0.45 x 25 L or more 4.9 N 2
40, 50, 63 M3 x 0.5 x 30 L or more 10 N 3

CG1
Pressure
80, 100 M5 x 0.8 x 40 L or more 24.5 N 3
Remove the bolt for normal operation.
It can cause lock malfunction or faulty release.
Piston rod

Double Acting, Single Rod

Rubber cap 2. The lock piston is pushed up further.

CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1KW
2. Locking type manual release 3. The lock piston is pushed up into the groove of the piston rod to lock it.
While pushing the M/O knob, turn it 90° counterclockwise. The lock is
(The lock piston is pushed up by spring force.) At this time, it is
released (and remains in a released state) by aligning the mark on

Double Acting, Single Rod

exhausted from the port on the head side and introduced into the
the cap with the OFF mark on the M/O knob.

Direct Mount
atmosphere.
When locking is desired, turn the M/O knob 90° clockwise while

CG1R
pushing completely down, and align the mark on the cap with the
ON mark on the M/O knob. The correct position is confirmed by a
clicking sound.
Failure to click it into place properly can cause the lock to disengage.

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Lock

CG1KR
Release
Locked state

4. When pressure is supplied in the head side, lock piston will be pushed
up to release the lock.

Back pressure
With End Lock

CBG1

Exhaust
Locked state Unlocked state
Pressure
Unlocked state
Auto Switch

5. When the lock is released, the cylinder will move forward.

Made to Order

Exhaust

66
67
 Series CG1
Auto Switch Mounting

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height
Solid state auto switch Reed auto switch
D-M9쏔/M9쏔W, D-M9쏔A D-A9쏔

Double Acting, Double Rod

ø 20 to ø 63 ø 20 to ø 63

CG1W
Standard
≈Hs ≈Hs

16

16
A 22 B A 24.5 B

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

(24) (22)
( ): Dimension of the D-M9쏔A ( ): Dimension of the D-A96
A and B are the dimensions from the end of the A and B are the dimensions from the end of the

CG1
head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch. head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch.
D-M9쏔V/M9쏔WV, D-M9쏔AV D-A9쏔V
ø 20 to ø 63 ø 20 to ø 63
≈Hs ≈Hs

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1K
16

16
A 20 B A 22 B

Non-rotating Rod
(22)
( ): Dimension of the D-M9쏔AV A and B are the dimensions from the end of the
A and B are the dimensions from the end of the head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch.

Double Acting, Double Rod

head cover/rod cover to the end of the auto switch.

CG1KW
D-G5/K5/G5쏔W/G5BA D-C7/C8, D-C73C/C80C
D-K59W, D-G59F, D-G5NT ø 20 to ø 63
ø 20 to ø 100
≈Hs ≈Hs

Double Acting, Single Rod

24.5

Direct Mount
16

CG1R
A B A B

D-H7쏔/H7쏔W D-B5/B6/B59W
D-H7NF/H7BA/D-H7C ø 20 to ø 100

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

ø 20 to ø 63

CG1KR
≈Hs ≈Hs
24.5
16

A B A B
With End Lock

CBG1

Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm]

Auto switch D-H7쏔 D-G5/K5
model D-M9쏔(V) D-H7쏔W D-G5쏔W
D-G5NT
D-M9쏔W(V) D-C73C D-G59F
D-H7NF D-K59W
D-M9쏔A(V) D-C80C D-H7C
D-H7BA D-B5/B6
Auto Switch

D-A9쏔(V) D-G5BA
D-C7/C8 D-B59W
Bore size Hs Hs Hs
20 26.5 27 27.5
25 29 29.5 30
32 32.5 33 33.5
Made to Order

40 37 37.5 38
50 42.5 43 43.5
63 49.5 50 50.5
80 — — 59
100 — — 69.5

68
Series CG1

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End)

Except Single Acting, Direct Mount Type (CG1R, CG1KR) and With End Lock (CBG1) [mm]
Auto switch D-M9쏔 D-H7쏔W D-G5쏔/K59
model D-M9쏔V D-H7NF
D-C7쏔
D-G5쏔W/K59W
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔 D-C80 D-B5쏔
D-H7BA D-G59F D-B59W
D-M9쏔WV D-A9쏔V D-C73C D-B64
D-H7쏔 D-G5NT
D-M9쏔A D-C80C
D-H7C D-G5BA
D-M9쏔AV
Bore size A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
24 20 19.5 20.5 16 14.5 17.5
20 33
(32)
29
(28)
28.5
(27.5)
29.5
(28.5)
25
(24)
23.5
(22.5)
26.5
(25.5)
24.5 20.5 20 21 16.5 15 18
25 32.5
(32.5)
28.5
(28.5)
28
(28)
29
(29)
24.5
(24.5)
23
(23)
26
(26)
25 21 20.5 21.5 17 15.5 18.5
32 34
(33)
30
(29)
29.5
(28.5)
30.5
(29.5)
26
(25)
24.5
(23.5)
27.5
(26.5)
27 23 22.5 23.5 19 17.5 20.5
40 39
(36)
35
(32)
34.5
(31.5)
35.5
(32.5)
31
(28)
29.5
(26.5)
32.5
(29.5)
32 28 27.5 28.5 24 22.5 25.5
50 46
(44)
42
(40)
41.5
(39.5)
42.5
(40.5)
38
(36)
36.5
(34.5)
39.5
(37.5)
33.5 29.5 29 30 25.5 24 27
63 44.5
(45.5)
40.5
(41.5)
40
(41)
41
(42)
36.5
(37.5)
35
(36)
38
(39)
30.5 29 32
80 — — — — — — — — 49.5
(44.5)
48
(43)
51
(46)
31.5 30 33
100 — — — — — — — — 48.5
(45.5)
47
(44)
50
(47)
Note 1) The values in ( ) are for long stroke.
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.

Single Acting, Spring Return Type (S)

A dimensions
Auto switch model Bore size B
Up to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
20 58 83 108 — 24
D-M9쏔(V)
25 57.5 82.5 107.5 132.5 24.5
D-M9쏔W(V)
32 59 84 109 134 25
D-M9쏔A(V)
40 64 89 114 139 27
20 54 79 104 — 20
25 53.5 78.5 103.5 128.5 20.5
D-A9쏔(V)
32 55 80 105 130 21
40 60 85 110 135 23
D-H7쏔 20 53.5 78.5 103.5 — 19.5
D-H7쏔W 25 53 78 103 128 20
D-H7C
D-H7BA 32 54.5 79.5 109.5 129.5 20.5
D-H7NF 40 59.5 84.5 109.5 134.5 22.5
D-C7쏔 20 54.5 79.5 104.5 — 20.5
D-C80 25 54 79 104 129 21
D-C73C 32 55.5 80.5 105.5 130.5 21.5
D-C80C 40 60.5 85.5 110.5 135.5 23.5
20 50 75 100 — 16
D-G5NT 25 49.5 74.5 99.5 124.5 16.5
D-G59F 32 51 76 101 126 17
40 56 81 106 131 19
20 48.5 73.5 98.5 — 14.5
D-B5쏔 25 48 73 98 123 15
D-B64 32 49.5 74.5 99.5 124.5 15.5
40 54.5 79.5 104.5 129.5 17.5
20 51.5 76.5 101.5 — 17.5
25 51 76 101 126 18
D-B59W
32 52.5 77.5 102.5 127.5 18.5
40 57.5 82.5 107.5 132.5 20.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.

69
 Auto Switch Mounting Series CG1

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End)

Double Acting, Single Rod

Single Acting, Spring Extend Type (T) [mm]

CG1
B dimensions
Auto switch model Bore size A
Up to 50 st 51 to 100 st 101 to 125 st 126 to 200 st
20 33 49 74 99 —
D-M9쏔(V)
25 32.5 49.5 74.5 99.5 124.5
D-M9쏔W(V)

Double Acting, Double Rod

32 34 50 75 100 125
D-M9쏔A(V)
40 39 52 77 102 127

CG1W
Standard
20 29 45 70 95 —
25 28.5 45.5 70.5 95.5 120.5
D-A9쏔(V)
32 30 46 71 96 121
40 35 48 73 98 123
D-H7쏔 20 28.5 44.5 69.5 94.5 —
D-H7쏔W 25 28 45 70 95 120

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

D-H7C
D-H7BA 32 29.5 45.5 70.5 95.5 120.5
D-H7NF 40 34.5 47.5 72.5 97.5 122.5

CG1
D-C7쏔 20 29.5 45.5 70.5 95.5 —
D-C80 25 29 46 71 96 121
D-C73C 32 30.5 46.5 71.5 96.5 121.5
D-C80C 40 35.5 48.5 73.5 98.5 123.5
20 25 41 66 91 —

Double Acting, Single Rod

D-G5NT 25 24.5 41.5 66.5 91.5 116.5
D-G59F 32 26 42 67 92 117

CG1K
40 31 44 69 94 119
20 23.5 39.5 64.5 89.5 —
D-B5쏔

Non-rotating Rod
25 23 40 65 90 115
D-B64 32 24.5 40.5 65.5 90.5 115.5
40 29.5 42.5 67.5 92.5 117.5
20 26.5 42.5 67.5 92.5 —

Double Acting, Double Rod

25 26 43 68 93 118

CG1KW
D-B59W
32 27.5 43.5 68.5 93.5 118.5
40 32.5 45.5 70.5 95.5 120.5
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount Type (CG1R, CG1KR) [mm]

Direct Mount

CG1R
Auto switch D-M9쏔 D-H7쏔W
model D-M9쏔V D-C7쏔
D-H7NF
D-M9쏔W D-A9쏔 D-C80 D-G59F D-B5쏔
D-H7BA D-B59W
D-M9쏔WV D-A9쏔V D-C73C D-G5NT D-B64
D-M9쏔A D-H7쏔
D-C80C
D-M9쏔AV D-H7C

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Bore size A B A B A B A B A B A B A B

CG1KR
20 12 24 8 20 7.5 19.5 8.5 20.5 4 16 2.5 14.5 5.5 17.5
25 11.5 24.5 7.5 20.5 7 20 8 21 3.5 16.5 2 15 5 18
32 13 25 9 21 8.5 20.5 9.5 21.5 5 17 3.5 15.5 6.5 18.5
40 18 27 14 23 13.5 22.5 14.5 23.5 10 19 8.5 17.5 11.5 20.5
50 20 32 16 28 15.5 27.5 16.5 28.5 12 24 10.5 22.5 13.5 25.5
63 18.5 33.5 14.5 29.5 14 29 15 30 10.5 25.5 9 24 12 27
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
With End Lock

CBG1
Auto Switch
Made to Order

70
Series CG1

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End)

With End Lock (CBG1) [mm]
Auto switch D-G5쏔W
model D-M9쏔
D-M9쏔V D-H7쏔 D-K59W
D-C7
D-M9쏔W D-H7C D-G59F
D-A9쏔 D-C8 D-B5
Lock D-H7쏔W D-G5 D-B59W
D-M9쏔WV D-A9쏔V D-C73C D-B6
position D-H7BA D-K5
D-M9쏔A D-C80C
D-H7NF D-G5NT
D-M9쏔AV D-G5BA
Bore size A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
Head end 33 36 29 32 28.5 31.5 25 28 29.5 32.5 23.5 26.5 26.5 29.5
24 20 19.5 16 20.5 14.5 17.5
20 Rod end 44 40 39.5 36 40.5 34.5 37.5
(32) (28) (27.5) (24) (28.5) (22.5) (25.5)
Double end 44 36 40 32 39.5 31.5 36 28 40.5 32.5 34.5 26.5 37.5 29.5
Head end 33 36 29 32 28.5 31.5 25 28 29.5 32.5 23.5 26.5 26.5 29.5
24 20 19.5 16 20.5 14.5 17.5
25 Rod end 44 40 39.5 36 40.5 34.5 37.5
(32) (28) (27.5) (24) (28.5) (22.5) (25.5)
Double end 44 36 40 32 39.5 31.5 36 28 40.5 32.5 34.5 26.5 37.5 29.5
Head end 34 35 30 31 29.5 30.5 26 27 30.5 31.5 24.5 25.5 27.5 28.5
25 21 20.5 17 21.5 15.5 18.5
32 Rod end 44 40 39.5 36 40.5 34.5 37.5
(33) (29) (28.5) (25) (29.5) (23.5) (26.5)
Double end 44 35 40 31 39.5 30.5 36 27 40.5 31.5 34.5 25.5 37.5 28.5
Head end 39 41 35 37 34.5 36.5 31 33 35.5 37.5 29.5 31.5 32 34.5
27 23 22.5 19 23.5 17.5 20.5
40 Rod end 48 44 43.5 40 44.5 38.5 41
(36) (32) (31.5) (28) (32.5) (26.5) (29.5)
Double end 48 41 44 37 43.5 36.5 40 33 44.5 37.5 38.5 31.5 41 34.5
Head end 46 49 42 45 41.5 44.5 38 41 42.5 45.5 36.5 39.5 39.5 42.5
32 28 27.5 24 28.5 22.5 25.5
50 Rod end 58 54 53.5 50 54.5 48.5 51.5
(44) (40) (39.5) (36) (40.5) (34.5) (37.5)
Double end 58 49 54 45 53.5 44.5 50 41 54.5 45.5 48.5 39.5 51.5 42.5
Head end 46 49 42 45 41.5 44.5 38 41 42.5 45.5 36.5 39.5 39.5 42.5
32 28 27.5 24 28.5 22.5 25.5
63 Rod end 58 54 53.5 50 54.5 48.5 51.5
(44) (40) (39.5) (36) (40.5) (34.5) (37.5)
Double end 58 49 54 45 53.5 44.5 50 41 54.5 45.5 48.5 39.5 51.5 42.5
Head end 48 54 46.5 52.5 49.5 55.5
32 30.5 33.5
80 Rod end — — — — — — 64 — — 62.5 65.5
(46) (44.5) (47.5)
Double end 64 54 62.5 52.5 65.5 55.5
Head end 48 54 46.5 52.5 49.5 55.5
32 30.5 33.5
100 Rod end — — — — — — 64 — — 62.5 65.5
(46) (44.5) (47.5)
Double end 64 54 62.5 52.5 65.5 55.5
Note 1) The values in ( ) are for long stroke.
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.

71
 Auto Switch Mounting Series CG1

Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting

Double Acting, Single Rod

n: Number of auto switches [mm]

CG1
Number of auto switches
Auto switch model With 2 pcs. With n pcs.
With 1 pc.
Different surfaces Same surface Different surfaces Same surface
(n – 2)
20 + 35 55 + 35 (n – 2)

Double Acting, Double Rod

D-M9쏔 5 15 Note 1) 40 Note 1) 2
(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)

CG1W
Standard
(n – 2)
20 + 35 55 + 35 (n – 2)
D-M9쏔W 10 15 Note 1) 40 Note 1) 2
(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
(n – 2)
25 + 35 60 + 35 (n – 2)
D-M9쏔A 10 25 40 Note 1) 2
(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

(n – 2)
15 + 35 50 + 35 (n – 2)
D-A9쏔 5 15 30 Note 1) 2
(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)

CG1
(n – 2)
20 + 35 35 + 35 (n – 2)
D-M9쏔V 5 20 35 2
(n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3)
(n – 2)
15 + 35 25 + 35 (n – 2)
D-A9쏔V 5 15 25 2

Double Acting, Single Rod

(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
(n – 2)

CG1K
D-M9쏔WV 10 20 35
20 + 35
2
35 + 35 (n – 2)
D-M9쏔AV (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)

Non-rotating Rod
(n – 2)
D-C7쏔 5 15 50
15 + 45 50 + 45 (n – 2)
2
D-C80 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)

Double Acting, Double Rod

D-H7쏔
(n – 2)

CG1KW
D-H7쏔W 10 15 60
15 + 45 60 + 45 (n – 2)
2
D-H7BA (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
D-H7NF

D-H7C (n – 2)
65 + 50 (n – 2)
15 + 50
D-C73C 5 15 65 2
(n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
D-C80C (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3)

Double Acting, Single Rod

D-G5쏔

Direct Mount
(n – 2)

CG1R
D-K59쏔 5 15 75
15 + 50 75 + 55 (n – 2)
2
D-B5쏔 (n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3) (n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
D-B64
(n – 2)
20 + 50 75 + 55 (n – 2)
D-B59W 10 20 75 2
(n = 2, 3, 4, 5···)
(n = 2, 4, 6···) Note 3)

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

Note 3) When “n” is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this odd number is used for the calculation.
Note 1) Auto switch mounting

CG1KR
With 2 auto switches
Different surfaces Note 1) Same surface Note 1)

A 15
3.5
With End Lock

CBG1

Auto switch model

Auto Switch

B
The auto switch is mounted by slightly displacing it in a
Correct auto switch mounting position is 3.5 mm from the back direction (cylinder tube circumferential exterior) so that the
face of the switch holder. auto switch and lead wire do not interfere with each other.

D-M9쏔 Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 55 stroke Note 2)

D-M9쏔W
Made to Order

D-M9쏔A Less than 20 stroke Note 2) Less than 60 stroke Note 2)

D-A9쏔 — Less than 50 stroke Note 2)
Note 2) Minimum stroke for auto switch mounting in styles other than those mentioned in Note 1.

72
Series CG1

Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.

Bore size [mm]

Auto switch model
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
D-M9쏔(V) BMA3-020 BMA3-025 BMA3-032 BMA3-040 BMA3-050 BMA3-063
D-M9쏔W(V) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d) (A set of a, b, c, d)
— —
D-A9쏔(V)
BMA3-020S BMA3-025S BMA3-032S BMA3-040S BMA3-050S BMA3-063S
D-M9쏔A(V) Note 2) (A set of b, c, d, e) (A set of b, c, d, e) (A set of b, c, d, e) (A set of b, c, d, e) (A set of b, c, d, e) (A set of b, c, d, e) — —

Switch bracket (Resin)

Auto switch
a Transparent (Nylon) Note 1)
e White (PBT)

b
Switch holder

d
Auto switch
mounting screw
c
Auto switch mounting band

∗ Band (c) is mounted so that the projected part is

on the internal side (contact side with the tube).

D-H7쏔
D-H7쏔W BMA2-020A BMA2-025A BMA2-032A BMA2-040A BMA2-050A BMA2-063A
D-H7NF (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw)
— —
D-C7쏔/C80
D-C73C/C80C
BMA2-020AS BMA2-025AS BMA2-032AS BMA2-040AS BMA2-050AS BMA2-063AS
D-H7BA (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw)
— —

D-G5쏔/K59
D-G5쏔W/K59W
D-G5BA/G59F BA-01 BA-02 BA-32 BA-04 BA-05 BA-06 BA-08 BA-10
D-G5NT (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw) (A set of band and screw)
D-B5쏔/B64
D-B59W
D-G5NB
Note 1) Since the switch bracket (made from nylon) are affected in an environment where alcohol, chloroform, methylamines, hydrochloric acid or sulfuric
acid is splashed over, so it cannot be used.
Please contact SMC regarding other chemicals.
Note 2) As the indicator LED is projected from the switch unit, indicator LED may be damaged if the switch bracket is fixed on the indicator LED.

Band Mounting Brackets Set Part No.

Set part no. Contents
BMA2-쏔쏔쏔A(S) · Auto switch mounting band (c)
∗ S: Stainless steel screw · Auto switch mounting screw (d)
· Switch bracket (White/PBT) (e)
BJ4-1 · Switch holder (b)
· Switch bracket (Transparent/Nylon) (a)
BJ5-1 · Switch holder (b)

[Stainless Steel Mounting Screw]

The following stainless steel mounting screw kit is available. Use it in accordance with the operating environment.
(Since the auto switch mounting bracket is not included, order it separately.)
BBA3: D-B5/B6/G5/K5 types
Note 3) Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for details on the BBA3.
When the D-G5BA type auto switch is shipped independently, the BBA3 is attached.

73
 Auto Switch Mounting Series CG1

Operating Range

Double Acting, Single Rod

[mm]

CG1
Bore size
Auto switch model
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
D-M9쏔(V)
D-M9쏔W(V) 4.5 5.0 4.5 5.5 5.0 5.5 — —
D-M9쏔A(V)

Double Acting, Double Rod

D-A9쏔 7 6 8 8 8 9 — —

CG1W
Standard
D-C7/C80 8 10 9 10 10 11 — —
D-C73C/C80C
D-B5쏔/B64 8 10 9 10 10 11 11 11
D-B59W 13 13 14 14 14 17 16 18
D-H7쏔/H7쏔W

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

4 4 4.5 5 6 6.5 — —
D-H7NF/H7BA
D-H7C 7 8.5 9 10 9.5 10.5 — —

CG1
D-G5쏔/G5쏔W/G59F 4 4 4.5 5 6 6.5 6.5 7
D-G5BA/K59/K59W
D-G5NT 4 4 4.5 5 6 6.5 6.5 7
D-G5NB 35 40 40 45 45 45 45 50

Double Acting, Single Rod

∗ Values which include hysteresis are for guideline purposes only, they are not a guarantee (assuming approximately ±30 % dispersion) and may change
substantially depending on the ambient environment.

CG1K
Cylinder Mounting Bracket, by Stroke/Auto Switch Mounting Surfaces

Non-rotating Rod
st: Stroke [mm]
Basic, Foot, Flange, Clevis Trunnion

Double Acting, Double Rod

Auto switch model With 1 pc. With 2 pcs. With 2 pcs. With 1 pc. With 2 pcs. With 2 pcs.

CG1KW
(Rod cover side) (Different surfaces) (Same surface) (Rod cover side) (Different surfaces) (Same surface)
Auto switch mounting
surface Port surface Port surface Port surface

Auto switch type

Double Acting, Single Rod

D-M9쏔(V)

Direct Mount

CG1R
D-M9쏔W(V)
10 st or more 15 to 44 st 45 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 44 st 45 st or more
D-M9쏔A(V)
D-A9쏔
D-C7/C8 10 st or more 15 to 49 st 50 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 49 st 50 st or more
D-H7쏔/H7쏔W
10 st or more 15 to 59 st 60 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 59 st 60 st or more

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

D-H7BA/H7NF
D-H7C/C73C/C80C 10 st or more 15 to 64 st 65 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 64 st 65 st or more

CG1KR
D-G5/K5/B5/B6
D-G5쏔W/K59W/G5BA 10 st or more 15 to 74 st 75 st or more 10 st or more 15 to 74 st 75 st or more
D-G59F/G5NT
D-B59W 15 st or more 20 to 74 st 75 st or more 15 st or more 20 to 74 st 75 st or more
∗ Trunnion type is not available for ø 80 and ø 100.
∗ Adjust the auto switch mounting angle according to the customer’s application.
With End Lock

CBG1

Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches are mountable.
Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for the detailed specifications.
Type Model Electrical entry Features Applicable bore size
D-H7A1, H7A2, H7B —
Auto Switch

D-H7NW, H7PW, H7BW Diagnostic indication (2-colour indication) ø 20 to ø 63

Solid state
D-H7BA Water resistant (2-colour indication)
D-G5NT Grommet (In-line) With timer ø 20 to ø 100
D-C73, C76 —
ø 20 to ø 63
Reed D-C80 Without indicator light
D-B53 — ø 20 to ø 100
Made to Order

∗ With pre-wired connector is also available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact) solid state auto switches (D-F9G/F9H) are also available. For details, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.
∗ Wide range detection type, solid state auto switch (D-G5NB) is also available. For details, refer to the Auto Switch Guide.

74
 Prior to Use
Auto Switch Connection and Example
Sink Input Specifications Source Input Specifications
3-wire, NPN 3-wire, PNP
Brown Input Brown Input

Black Black
Auto switch Auto switch
Blue Blue
COM COM
(PLC internal circuit) (PLC internal circuit)

2-wire 2-wire
Brown Input Brown COM

Auto switch Auto switch

Blue Blue
COM Input
(PLC internal circuit) (PLC internal circuit)

Connect according to the applicable PLC input specifications, as the connection method will vary depending on the PLC input specifications.

Example of AND (Series) and OR (Parallel) Connection

∗ When using solid state auto switches, ensure the application is set up so the signals for the first 50 ms are invalid.
3-wire AND connection for NPN output 3-wire OR connection for NPN output
(Using relays) (Performed with auto switches only)
Brown Brown Brown
Relay
Load
Black Black Load Black Load
Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1
Blue Blue Blue

Brown Brown Brown

Black Black Black

Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2
Blue Blue Blue

3-wire AND connection for PNP output 3-wire OR connection for PNP output
(Using relays)
(Performed with auto switches only)
Brown Brown Brown
Relay
Black Black Black
Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1 Auto switch 1
Blue Blue Blue

Brown Brown Brown

Black Black Load Black Load

Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2
Blue Load Blue Blue

2-wire AND connection 2-wire OR connection

Brown When two auto switches are Brown
connected in series, a load (Solid state) (Reed)
Load may malfunction because Load When two auto Because there is no
Auto switch 1 the load voltage will decline Auto switch 1 switches are current leakage, the load
Blue when in the ON state. Blue connected in parallel, voltage will not increase
The indicator lights will light malfunction may occur when turned OFF.
Brown up when both of the auto Brown because the load However, depending on
switches are in the ON state. voltage will increase the number of auto
Auto switches with load when in the OFF state. switches in the ON state,
Auto switch 2 Auto switch 2
voltage less than 20 V the indicator lights may
Blue cannot be used. Blue sometimes grow dim or
not light up, due to the
Load voltage at ON = Power supply voltage – Load voltage at OFF = Leakage current x 2 pcs. x dispersion and reduction
Residual voltage x 2 pcs. Load impedance of the current flowing to
= 24 V − 4 V x 2 pcs. = 1 mA x 2 pcs. x 3 kΩ the auto switches.
= 16 V =6V
Example: Power supply is 24 VDC Example: Load impedance is 3 kΩ.
Internal voltage drop in auto switch is 4 V. Leakage current from auto switch is 1 mA.

75
76
With End Lock Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod Direct Mount Non-rotating Rod Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod Double Acting, Double Rod Double Acting, Single Rod Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend Double Acting, Double Rod Double Acting, Single Rod
Made to Order Auto Switch CBG1 CG1KR CG1R CG1KW CG1K CG1 CG1W CG1
 Series CG1
Simple Specials/Made to Order
Please contact SMC for detailed specifications, delivery and prices.

The following special specifications can be ordered as a simplified Made-to-Order.

왎 Simple Specials There is a specification sheet available on paper and CD-ROM. Please contact your SMC sales representatives if necessary.
CG1
(Standard type)
Symbol Specifications Double acting Single acting
Single rod Double rod Single rod
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber

-XA0 to 30 Change of rod end shape

왎 Made to Order
CG1
(Standard type)
Symbol Specifications Double acting Single acting
Single rod Double rod Single rod
Rubber Air Rubber Air Rubber

-XB6 Heat resistant cylinder (−10 to 150 °C)

-XB7 Cold resistant cylinder (−40 to 70 °C)

-XB9 Low speed cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s)

-XB13 Low speed cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s)

-XC4 With heavy duty scraper

Note 2)
-XC6 Made of stainless steel

-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type

-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type

-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type

-XC12 Tandem cylinder

-XC13 Auto switch rail mounting

-XC20 Head cover axial port

-XC22 Fluororubber seal

-XC27 Double clevis and double knuckle joint pins made of stainless steel
Note 2)
-XC29 Double knuckle joint with spring pin

-XC35 With coil scraper

-XC37 Larger throttle diameter of connection port

-XC42 Built-in shock absorber in head cover side

-XC85 Grease for food processing equipment

-X446 PTFE grease

Note 1) The shape is the same as the existing product. Use the existing seal kit.
Note 2) Single acting/spring return type (S) only

77
 Simple Specials/Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
CG1K CG1R CG1KR CBG1
(Non-rotating rod type) (Direct mount type) (Direct mount, Non-rotating rod type) (With end lock ) Note 1)
Double acting Double acting Double acting Double acting Symbol Page
Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Single rod

Double Acting, Double Rod

Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air

CG1W
Standard
-XA1 to 30 Page 79

CG1K CG1R CG1KR CBG1

(Non-rotating rod type) (Direct mount type) (Direct mount, Non-rotating rod type) (With end lock) Note 1)
Double acting Double acting Double acting Double acting Symbol Page

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Single rod Double rod Single rod Single rod Single rod
Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air Rubber Rubber Air

CG1
-XB6 Page 81
Note 1)
-XB7 Page 81
Note 1)
-XB9 Page 81

Double Acting, Single Rod

Note 1)
-XB13 Page 82

CG1K
-XC4 Page 82

-XC6 Page 82

Non-rotating Rod
Note 1)
-XC8 Page 83

Double Acting, Double Rod

Note 1)
-XC9 Page 84

CG1KW
-XC10 Page 85

-XC11 Page 85, 86

Note 1)
-XC12 Page 87

Double Acting, Single Rod

-XC13 Page 87 to 89

Direct Mount

CG1R
-XC20 Page 90

-XC22 Page 90

-XC27 Page 90

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

-XC29 Page 91

CG1KR
-XC35 Page 91

-XC37 Page 91

-XC42 Page 92

-XC85 Page 93
With End Lock

CBG1

-X446 Page 93
Auto Switch
Made to Order

78
 Series CG1
Simple Specials
These changes are dealt with Simple Specials System.

1 Change of Rod End Shape

Applicable Series
Symbol for change of
Series Action Note
rod end shape
CG1 Double acting, Single rod XA0 to 30 ∗1
Standard type
CG1W Double acting, Double rod XA0 to 30
Non-rotating rod type CG1K Double acting, Single rod XA0 to 30 ∗1
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod XA0 to 30 ∗2
With end lock CBG1 Double acting, Single rod XA0 to 30
∗1: Except rod end bracket, pivot bracket ∗2: Except pivot bracket

Precautions
1. SMC will make appropriate arrangements if no dimension, D ≤ 6 씮 D − 1 mm 6 < D ≤ 25 씮 D − 2 mm D > 25 씮 D − 4 mm
tolerance, or finish instructions are given in the diagram. 3. In the case of double rod type and single acting retraction type, enter
2. Standard dimensions marked with “∗” will be as follows to the rod the dimensions when the rod is retracted.
diameter (D). Enter any special dimension you desire.

Symbol: A0 Symbol: A1 Symbol: A2 Symbol: A3

C C0.5 øDA
30n 30n

A T W1
H H H
H

Symbol: A4 Symbol: A5 Symbol: A6 Symbol: A7

øRD øRD B MM AL MM AL
30n

L 30n 30n 30n

H W L
H H
H

Symbol: A8 Symbol: A9 Symbol: A10 Symbol: A11

yC0.5 file chamfer

B AL WA
C R sphere
MM R sphere TP
øDC

30n
T W1 H
H H
H

Symbol: A12 Symbol: A13 Symbol: A14 Symbol: A15

C0.5 øDA AL øDA

C øDA 30n MM C øDA 30n
R sphere 30n

T W1 A A A
C
H H H H

79
 Simple Specials Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1
Double Acting, Double Rod
CG1W
Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
CG1
Double Acting, Single Rod
CG1K
Non-rotating Rod
Symbol: A16 Symbol: A17 Symbol: A18 Symbol: A19

AL øDA

Double Acting, Double Rod

MM 30n MM 30n MM 30n MM 30n

CG1KW

C A A A A
H H H H

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol: A20 Symbol: A21 Symbol: A22 Symbol: A23

Direct Mount

CG1R
øDA

30n 30n øRD

øDA

30n MM MM 30n
MM L
øDB

øDB

T T B

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

C
A LK
A A A
H W

CG1KR
H H H

Symbol: A24 Symbol: A25 Symbol: A26 Symbol: A27

øDA
MM MM MM
30n

30n øDA
MM
With End Lock

CBG1

A L A
AL AL LK AL LB K H
H H H

Symbol: A28 Symbol: A29 Symbol: A30

Auto Switch

30n 30n 30n

MM
øDA W L MM
W

A T AL T
L A
Made to Order

A
H MM H H

80
 Series CG1
Made to Order
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications and lead times.

Symbol
1 Heat Resistant Cylinder (–10 to 150 °C) -XB6
Air cylinder which changed the seal material and grease, so that it could be used even at higher temperature up to 150 from −10 °C.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Ambient temperature range −10 °C to 150 °C
CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except with auto switch. Seal material Fluororubber
Standard type
CG1W Double acting, Double rod Cylinders with rubber Grease Heat resistant grease
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod bumper have no bumper.
Specifications other than above
Same as standard type
Note 1) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. and external dimensions
Note 2) Please contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for this
cylinder, which differ from those of the standard cylinder.
Note 3) In principle, it is impossible to make built-in magnet type and the one Warning
with auto switch. But, as for the one with auto switch, and the heat Precautions
resistant cylinder with heat resistant auto switch, please contact SMC.
Note 4) Piston speed is ranged from 50 to 500 mm/s. Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
How to Order hazardous to humans.

Standard model no. XB6

Heat resistant cylinder

Symbol
2 Cold Resistant Cylinder (−40 to 70 °C) -XB7
Air cylinder which changed the seal material and grease, so that it could be used even at lower temperature down to −40 °C.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Ambient temperature range −40 °C to 70 °C
Double acting, Except with air cushion and auto switch, Seal material Low nitrile rubber
CG1 rod end bracket, pivot bracket.
Single rod Grease Cold resistant grease
Standard type Cylinders with rubber bumper have no
Double acting, bumper. Auto switch Not mountable
CG1W
Double rod Except with rod boot and with air cushion. Dimensions Same as standard type
Direct mount Double acting, Except with air cushion and with auto switch. Additional specifications Same as standard type
CG1R
type Single rod Cylinders with rubber bumper have no bumper.
Note 1) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator. Warning
Note 2) Use dry air which is suitable for heatless air dryer etc. not to cause
the moisture to be frozen. Precautions
Note 3) Please contact SMC for details on the maintenance intervals for this Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
cylinder, which differ from those of the standard cylinder. contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
Note 4) Mounting auto switch is impossible. hazardous to humans.
Note 5) Without a bumper.
Piston speed is ranged from 50 to 500 mm/s.

How to Order
Standard model no. XB7
Cold resistant cylinder

Symbol
3 Low Speed Cylinder (10 to 50 mm/s) -XB9
Even if driving at lower speeds 10 to 50 mm/s, there would be no stick-slip phenomenon and it can run smoothly.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Piston speed 10 to 50 mm/s
Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except with rod boot and with air cushion Dimensions Same as standard type
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion Additional specifications Same as standard type
Note) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator.

How to Order Warning

Precautions
Standard model no. XB9
Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
Low speed cylinder contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
hazardous to humans.
81
 Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol
4 Low Speed Cylinder (5 to 50 mm/s) -XB13

CG1
Even if driving at lower speeds 5 to 50 mm/s, there would be no stick-slip phenomenon and it can run smoothly.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Piston speed 5 to 50 mm/s

Double Acting, Double Rod

Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except with rod boot and with air cushion Dimensions Same as standard type

CG1W
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion

Standard
Additional specifications Same as standard type
Note 1) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator.
Note 2) For speed adjustment, use speed controllers for controlling at
lower speeds. (Series AS-FM/AS-M)
Warning
Precautions
How to Order Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Standard model no. XB13 contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is
hazardous to humans.

CG1
Low speed cylinder

Symbol
5 With Heavy Duty Scraper -XC4

Double Acting, Single Rod

It is suitable for using cylinders under the environment, where there are much dusts in a surrounding area by using a heavy duty scraper on the

CG1K
wiper ring, or using cylinders under earth and sand exposed to the die-casted equipment, construction machinery, or industrial vehicles.

Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard type

Non-rotating Rod
Description Model Action Note
Double acting, Caution
Standard type CG1 ø 32 to ø 63 only

Double Acting, Double Rod

Single rod Do not replace heavy duty scrapers.
앫Since heavy duty scrapers are press-fit, they must be replaced together

CG1KW
How to Order with the scraper bracket.

Standard model no. XC4

With heavy duty scraper

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount
Dimensions

CG1R
[mm]
Bore H ZZ
size
E2 FA FB M I2
Male thread Female thread Male thread Female thread
32 17 8 3 5 38 48 28 121 101
40 21 8 3 3.5 47 58 29 138 109

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

50 26 9 3 4.5 58 66 30 158 122

CG1KR
63 26 9 3 5.5 72 66 30 158 122

∗ Other dimensions are the same as double acting, Long Stroke

single rod, standard type. ZZ
∗ On the axial foot and the rod flange types, the Male thread Female thread
mounting bracket is wedged and bolted between 129 109
ZZ + Stroke
the cylinder and the scraper at the time of 147 118
With End Lock

shipment. On other types, it is placed in the 170 134

CBG1

same package, (but not assembled).

170 134

Symbol
6 Made of Stainless Steel -XC6
Auto Switch

Suitable for the cases it is likely to generate rust by being immersed in the water and corrosion.

Applicable Series How to Order

Description Model Action Note Standard model no. XC6
Double acting, Single rod
CG1
Standard type Single acting (Spring return) Made of stainless steel
Made to Order

CG1W Double acting, Double rod

Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod
Specifications
Parts changed to stainless steel Piston rod, Rod end nut
Smooth Cylinder CG1Y Double acting, Single rod
Specifications other than above
Same as standard type
and external dimensions

82
Series CG1

Symbol
7 Adjustable Stroke Cylinder/Adjustable Extension Type -XC8
It adjusts the extending stroke by the stroke adjustable mechanism equipped in the head side.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Stroke adjustment symbol A B
Standard type CG1 Double acting Stroke adjustment range [mm] 0 to 25 0 to 50
Non-rotating rod type CG1K Double acting Except with air cushion Additional specifications Same as standard type
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting Except with air cushion
Direct mount, Non-rotating rod type CG1KR Double acting Except with air cushion∗1
∗1 The shape is the same as the existing product. Use the existing seal kit.

How to Order
CG1 Mounting style Type Bore size Stroke Stroke adjustment symbol Z Pivot bracket Rod end bracket XC8
∗ Except head flange and clevis types

CG1KR Mounting style Type Bore size Stroke Stroke adjustment symbol XC8
Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
Warning
Precautions
1. When the cylinder is operating, if something gets caught between the
Stroke adjustment mechanism stopper bracket for adjusting the stroke and the cylinder body, it could
cause bodily injury or damage the peripheral equipment. Therefore, take
preventive measures as necessary, such as installing a protective cover.
2. To adjust the stroke, make sure to secure the wrench flats of the
stopper bracket by a wrench etc. before loosening the lock nut. If the
lock nut is loosened without securing the stopper bracket, be aware that
the area that joins the load to the piston rod or the area in which the
piston rod is joined with the load side and the stopper bracket side
could loosen first. It may cause an accident or malfunction.

Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as standard type.)
Series CG1
Stopper bracket Width across flats MA Width across flats B2
Stopper MM2
øMI

MK H2 [mm]
MT Stroke ML + Adjustment Bore
S + Stroke MH + Stroke + Adjustment size
B2 H2 MA MH MI MK ML MM2 MT S ZZ
ZZ + 2 x Stroke + Adjustment (A: 25 mm, B: 50 mm) 20 10 3.6 12 38 14 7 18 M6 x 1 9 77 150
25 13 5 17 41 20 9 18 M8 x 1.25 11 77 158
32 13 5 17 41 20 9 18 M8 x 1.25 11 79 160
40 17 6 19 47 25 10 24 M10 x 1.25 11 87 184
50 19 8 24 60 32 13 32 M14 x 1.5 11 102 220
63 19 8 24 60 32 13 32 M14 x 1.5 13 102 220
∗ On the axial foot type, the foot is wedged and bolted between the
cylinder and the stopper bracket at the time of shipment. On other
types, it is placed in the same package, (but not assembled).

Series CG1K/CG1R/CG1KR
Width across flats MA
Width across flats B2
øMI

MM2

MK H2 [mm]
MT Stroke ML + Adjustment Bore
S + Stroke MH + Stroke + Adjustment size
B2 H2 MA MH MI MK ML MM2 MT S ZZ
ZZ + 2 x Stroke + Adjustment (A: 25 mm, B: 50 mm) 20 10 3.6 12 38 14 7 18 M6 x 1 9 83 148
25 13 5 17 41 20 9 18 M8 x 1.25 11 85 158
32 13 5 17 41 20 9 18 M8 x 1.25 11 91 164
40 17 6 19 47 25 10 24 M10 x 1.25 11 103 189
50 19 8 24 60 32 13 32 M14 x 1.5 11 120 225
63 19 8 24 60 32 13 32 M14 x 1.5 13 126 231
83
 Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol
8 Adjustable Stroke Cylinder/Adjustable Retraction Type -XC9

CG1
The retracting stroke of the cylinder can be adjusted by the adjustment bolt.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Stroke adjustment symbol A B

Double Acting, Double Rod

Double acting, Except head flange Stroke adjustment range [mm] 0 to 25 0 to 50
Standard type CG1

CG1W
Standard
Single rod and clevis types
Additional specifications Same as standard type
Non-rotating rod Double acting, Except head flange and clevis
CG1K
type Single rod types and with air cushion
Double acting,
Direct mount type CG1R Except with air cushion
Single rod

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Direct mount,
CG1KR Double acting Except with air cushion∗1
Non-rotating rod type

CG1
∗1 The shape is the same as the existing product. Use the existing seal kit.

How to Order
CG1 Mounting style Type Bore size Stroke Stroke adjustment symbol Z Rod end bracket XC9

Double Acting, Single Rod

∗ Except head flange and clevis types

CG1KR Mounting style Type Bore size XC9

CG1K
Stroke Stroke adjustment symbol

Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type

Non-rotating Rod
Warning
Precautions

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
1. When air is supplied to the cylinder, if the stroke adjustment bolt is
loosened in excess of the allowable stroke adjustment amount, be
aware that the stroke adjustment bolt could fly out or air could be
discharged, which could injure personnel or damage the peripheral
Adjustment bolt equipment.
2. Adjust the stroke when the cylinder is not pressurised.
If it is adjusted in the pressurised state, the seal of the adjustment

Double Acting, Single Rod

section could become deformed, leading to air leakage.

Direct Mount

CG1R
Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as standard type.)
[mm]
BM Rubber bumper Air cushion
Bore size BM S
MH ZZ MH ZZ

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

20 M6 x 1 77 23 135 21 133

CG1KR
25 M6 x 1 77 23 140 21 138
32 M8 x 1.25 79 25 144 25 144
40 M12 x 1.75 87 40 177 39 176
S MH + Adjustment
ZZ + Stroke + Adjustment (A: 25 mm, B: 50 mm)
50 M12 x 1.75 102 33 193 37 197
63 M16 x 2 102 40 200 44 204
∗ In the case of axial foot type, it is assembled at the time of shipment.
With End Lock

On other types, it is placed in the same package, (but not

CBG1

assembled).
∗ Dimensions other than above are the same as those for the CG1
series, long stroke type.
Auto Switch
Made to Order

84
Series CG1

Symbol
9 Dual Stroke Cylinder/Double Rod Type -XC10
Two cylinders are constructed as one cylinder in a back-to-back configuration allowing the cylinder stroke to be controlled in three steps.

Applicable Series
Description Model Action Note
Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except rod end bracket, pivot bracket
Non-rotating rod type CG1K Double acting, Single rod Except rod end bracket, pivot bracket

How to Order
CG1 Mounting style Type Bore size Stroke A Stroke B Suffix Z XC10
Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type

Function
B DC A When air pressure is supplied to Stroke B B D C A When air pressure is supplied to
ports and , both strokes A and ports and , B out strokes.
B retract.
B D C A Stroke A When air pressure is supplied to Stroke B B D C A Stroke A When air pressure is supplied to
ports and , A out strokes. ports and , both strokes A and
B out strokes.

Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as standard type.)

WC
GC
GD
WD
D port C port B port D port A port
WQ WQ C port

For C port
For D port

H SB + Stroke B SA + Stroke A H
ZZ + Stroke (A + B)

[mm]
Air cushion
Bore size GC GD H SA SB Wθ ZZ
WC WD
20 20.5 (21) 8.5 (9) 35 56.5 (56) 85.5 (86) 30° (25) (5) 212
25 21 (21.5) 9 (8.5) 40 56 86 30° (25) (5) 222
32 23 9 40 58 90 30° (27) (5) 228
40 23.5 (25) 7.5 (9) 50 66.5 (65) 97.5 (99) 20° (29) (5) 264
50 29 13 58 75 117 20° (33) (9) 308
63 28 12 58 76 116 (116) 20° (32) (8) 308
∗ ( ): With air cushion

Symbol
10 Dual Stroke Cylinder/Single Rod Type -XC11
Two cylinders can be integrated by connecting them in line, and the cylinder stroke can be controlled in two stages in both directions.

Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard type

Description Model Action Note ∗ Please contact SMC for each manufacturable stroke length.
Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod
Non-rotating rod type CG1K Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion

How to Order
CG1 Mounting style Type Bore size Stroke A Stroke B-A Suffix Z Pivot bracket Rod end bracket XC11

CG1K Mounting style Type Bore size Stroke A Stroke B-A Suffix XC11
Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type
85
 Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol
10 Dual Stroke Cylinder/Single Rod Type -XC11

CG1
Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as standard type.)
GC D port Note)

Double Acting, Double Rod

GD
A port
C port ∗ WD C port
Wθ Wθ D port

CG1W
Standard
B port ∗ Needle
position
for D port

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

H SB + Stroke B SA + Stroke A

CG1
ZZ + Stroke (A + B)

Note) D port style Type N: Rubber bumper, Plug with fixed orifice;
Type A: Air cushion, element non-installation (Release to atmospheric pressure)

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1, CG1K [mm]

CG1K
Air Long Note)
Bore
size
GC GD H SA SB Wθ ZZ cushion stroke
WD SA ZZ

Non-rotating Rod
20 21 9 35 48 87 30° 172 5 56 180
25 21 (21.5) 9 (8.5) 40 48 87 30° 177 6.5 56 185
32 23 9 40 50 91 30° 183 5 58 191

Double Acting, Double Rod

40 25 9 50 56 100 20° 208 5 65 217

CG1KW
50 29 13 58 63 118 20° 241 9 75 253
63 28 12 58 64 117 20° 241 8 76 253
∗ ( ): With air cushion
Note) When the stroke A is a long stroke (ø 20: 201 mm or more, ø 25 to
ø 63: 301 mm or more)

Functional description of dual stroke cylinder Stroke A or stroke B operation can be made individually.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Direct Mount

CG1R
B C A B C A Stroke A operation
1) Initial state
(0 stroke position) 1) Initial state
(0 stroke position)
2) 1st stage
Stroke B Stroke A (Stroke A operation) Stroke B Stroke A 2) Operation
A When the air pressure A When the air pressure
B C is supplied from the Stroke A B C is supplied from

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

port, the rod operates the port, the rod

CG1KR
the stroke A. operates the stroke A.
Stroke A
3) 2nd stage
(Stroke B-A operation) B C A Stroke B operation
C A Following the 1st stage,
Stroke B-A B when the air pressure 1) Initial state
is supplied from the (0 stroke position)
port, the rod operates Stroke B Stroke A 2) Operation
the stroke B-A. C When the air pressure
With End Lock

B Stroke B B A is supplied from

CBG1

C A
4) Cylinder retraction the port, the rod
When the air pressure operates the stroke B.
is supplied from the
port, the rod retracts
Stroke B Stroke A completely.
Caution
Precautions
1. Do not supply air until the cylinder is fixed with the attached bolt.
Auto Switch

Double output is possible. 2. If air is supplied without securing the cylinder, the cylinder could lurch,
posing the risk of bodily injury or damage to the peripheral equipment.
B C A
1) Initial state
(0 stroke position)
Stroke B Stroke A
Made to Order

2) Double output
C A When the air pressure
B
is supplied to the
and ports at the
W W same time, the double
output can be obtained
Stroke A in the stroke A range.
86
Series CG1

Symbol
11 Tandem Cylinder -XC12
This is a cylinder produced with two air cylinders in line allowing double the output force.

Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard type

Description Model Action Note
Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion Function
Non-rotating rod type CG1K Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion
When air pressure is supplied to ports
How to Order and d , the output force is doubled in the
retract stroke.
Standard model no. XC12
When air pressure is supplied to ports
Tandem cylinder and d , the output force is doubled in the
out stroke.

Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as standard type.)
GC
GD
B port C port D port A port C port Wθ Wθ D port

H SB + Stroke SA + Stroke
ZZ + 2 x Stroke

CG1 [mm] CG1K [mm]

Long stroke Note)
Bore size GC GD H SA SB Wθ ZZ Bore size GC GD H SA SB Wθ ZZ
SA ZZ
20 21 9 35 48 87 30° 172 56 180 20 21 9 35 48 87 30° 172
25 21 9 40 48 87 30° 177 56 185 25 21 9 40 48 87 30° 177
32 23 9 40 50 91 30° 183 58 191 32 23 9 40 50 91 30° 183
40 25 9 50 56 100 20° 208 65 217 40 24 8 50 57 99 20° 208
50 29 13 58 63 118 20° 241 75 253 50 28 12 58 64 117 20° 241
63 28 12 58 64 117 20° 241 76 253 63 28 12 58 64 117 20° 241
Note) In the case of long strokes (ø 20: 201 mm or more, ø 25 to ø 63: ∗ Please contact SMC for long stroke (301 mm or more) since SA-dimensions
301 mm or more) and ZZ-dimensions are different from those in the above table.
Symbol
12 Auto Switch Rail Mounting -XC13
A cylinder on which a rail is mounted to enable auto switches, in addition to the standard method for mounting auto switches (Band mounting).

Applicable Series How to Order

Description Model Action Note
CDG1 Standard model no. XC13A
Except trunnion and basic (without
CG1 Double acting, Single rod
Standard trunnion mounting female thread) types Rail mounting direction
type Except trunnion and basic (without Mounted on the right side when viewed from
CG1W Double acting, Double rod XC13A the rod with the ports facing upward.
trunnion mounting female thread) types
Non-rotating Except trunnion and basic (without trunnion mounting ∗ XC13B Mounted on the left side when viewed from the rod.
CG1K Double acting, Single rod
rod type female thread) types, Except with air cushion ∗ Not available for CBG1.
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion
Port
With end lock CBG1 Double acting, Single rod For XC13A only

Applicable Auto Switches B A

Solid D-M9쏔/M9쏔V, D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV, D-M9쏔A/M9쏔AV, D-F7쏔, D-F7쏔V,
Rail state D-F7BA, D-F79F, D-F79W, D-F7쏔WV, D-J79, D-J79C, D-J79W
mounting
Reed D-A7/A8, D-A7쏔H/A80H, D-A73C/A80C, D-A79W
Auto switch Refer to the Auto Switch Guide for additional
specifications information on auto switches.

87
 Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol
12 Auto Switch Rail Mounting -XC13

CG1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at Stroke End) and Its Mounting Height

Series CDG1 Series CDG1R

Double Acting, Double Rod

(ø 20 to ø 63)

CG1W
Standard
Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend
A B ≈ Hs A B ≈ Hs

CG1
Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end)
Applicable Cylinder Series: CDG1-XC13 [mm]
Auto switch D-M9쏔/D-M9쏔V D-F7쏔/F79F/F7쏔V D-F7BA/F7ABV
D-A7쏔
model D-M9쏔W/D-M9쏔WV D-J79/J79C D-A72/A7쏔H/A80H D-F7NT D-A79W
D-A80

Double Acting, Single Rod

D-M9쏔A/D-M9쏔AV D-F7쏔W/J79W/F7쏔WV D-A73C/A80C
Bore size A B A B A B A B A B

CG1K
20 31.5 22.5 (30.5) 30.5 21.5 (29.5) 35.5 26.5 (34.5) 30 21 (29) 27.5 18.5 (26.5)
25 31 23 (31) 30 22 (30) 35 27 (35) 29.5 21.5 (29.5) 27 19 (27)

Non-rotating Rod
32 32.5 23.5 (31.5) 31.5 22.5 (30.5) 36.5 27.5 (35.5) 31 22 (30) 28.5 19.5 (27.5)
40 37.5 25.5 (34.5) 36.5 24.5 (33.5) 41.5 29.5 (38.5) 36 24 (33) 33.5 21.5 (30.5)
50 44.5 30.5 (42.5) 43.5 29.5 (41.5) 49 34.5 (46.5) 43 29 (41) 40.5 26.5 (38.5)

Double Acting, Double Rod

63 43 32 (44) 42 31 (43) 47 36 (48) 41.5 30.5 (42.5) 39 28 (40)

CG1KW
80 56 37 (51) 55 36 (50) 60 41 (55) 54.5 35.5 (49.5) 52 33 (47)
100 55 38 (52) 54 37 (51) 59 42 (56) 53.5 36.5 (50.5) 51 34 (48)
Note 1) ( ): For long stroke
Note 2) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end)

Direct Mount
Applicable Cylinder Series: CDG1R-XC13

CG1R
[mm]
Auto switch D-M9쏔/D-M9쏔V D-F7쏔/F79F/F7쏔V D-F7BA/F7ABV
D-A7쏔
model D-M9쏔W/D-M9쏔WV D-J79/J79C D-A72/A7쏔H/A80H D-F7NT D-A79W
D-A80
D-M9쏔A/D-M9쏔AV D-F7쏔W/J79W/F7쏔WV D-A73C/A80C
Bore size A B A B A B A B A B
20 10.5 22.5 9.5 21.5 14.5 26.5 9 21 6.5 18.5

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

25 10 23 9 22 14 27 8.5 21.5 6 19

CG1KR
32 11.5 23.5 10.5 22.5 15.5 27.5 10 22 7.5 19.5
40 16.5 25.5 15.5 24.5 20.5 29.5 15 24 12.5 21.5
50 18.5 30.5 17.5 29.5 22.5 34.5 17 29 14.5 26.5
63 17 32 16 31 21 36 15.5 30.5 13 28
Note) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
With End Lock

Auto Switch Proper Mounting Position/Applicable Cylinder Series: CDBG1-XC13 [mm] Auto Switch Mounting Height [mm]
CBG1

Lock position H R W Auto switch D-M9쏔/M9쏔V

(Head end) (Rod end) (Double end) model D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV
D-F7쏔V
Bore size A B Note 2) A B A B Note 2) D-M9쏔A/M9쏔AV D-A7쏔 D-A73C
D-F7쏔WV D-J79C D-A79W
D-F7쏔/F79F D-A80 D-A80C
20 +0 +12 +11 +0 +11 +12 D-F7BAV
D-J79/F7NT
25 +0.5 +11.5 +11.5 −0.5 +11.5 +11.5 D-F7쏔W/J79W/F7BA
32 +0 +10 +10 +0 +10 +10
Auto Switch

Bore size Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs Hs
40 +0 +14 +9 +0 +9 +14 20 26.5 29 32 25.5 32.5 28
50 +0 +17 +12 +0 +12 +17 25 29 31.5 34.5 28 35 30.5
63 +1.5 +15.5 +13.5 −1.5 +13.5 +15.5 32 32.5 35 38 31.5 38.5 34
80 −1.5 +23.5 +14.5 +1.5 +14.5 +23.5 40 36.5 39 42 35.5 42.5 38
100 −0.5 +23.5 +15.5 +0.5 +15.5 +22.5 50 42 44.5 47.5 41 48 43.5
Made to Order

Note 1) For cylinders with end lock, add the above values to those listed in the table for 63 49 51.5 54.5 48 55 50.5
CG1-XC13.
Note 2) For the head and double end lock, add the above values to CG1-XC13 (long 80 59 61.5 64.5 58 65 60.5
stroke) to find B. 100 69.5 72 75 68.5 75.5 71
Note 3) Adjust the auto switch after confirming the operating condition in the actual setting.
Note 4) For the dimensions other than the auto switch proper mounting position and its
mounting height, refer to the standard type of the CBG1 series.
88
Series CG1

Symbol
12 Auto Switch Rail Mounting -XC13
Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting Operating Range
[mm] [mm]
Number of auto switches Bore size
Auto switch model Auto switch model
2 n (n: No. of auto switches) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
1
Same surface Same surface
D-M9쏔/M9쏔V D-M9쏔/M9쏔V
D-F7쏔V 5 5
10 + 10 (n – 2) D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV 4 4 5 4 5.5 6.5 7.5 7
(n = 4, 6 ···) Note) D-M9쏔A/M9쏔AV
D-J79C
D-M9쏔WV D-F7쏔/F79F/F7쏔V
D-M9쏔AV D-J79/J79C
10 + 15 (n – 2) D-F7쏔W/J79W/F7쏔WV 4.5 4 4.5 5 5 6 6 6
D-F7쏔WV 10 15
(n = 4, 6 ···) Note)
D-F7BAV D-F7BA/F7BAV
D-A79W D-F7NT
D-M9쏔W 10 15
15 + 15 (n – 2) D-A7쏔/A80
D-M9쏔A (n = 4, 6 ···) Note) D-A7쏔H/A80H 9 9 10 11 11 13.5 13 13.5
D-F7쏔 15 + 15 (n – 2) D-A73C/A80C
5 5
D-J79 (n = 4, 6 ···) Note)
D-A79W 11 11 13 14 14 16.5 16 16.5
D-F7쏔W/J79W
D-F7BA 10 15
15 + 20 (n – 2) ∗ Since the operating range is provided as a guideline including hysteresis, it
(n = 4, 6 ···) Note) cannot be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30 % dispersion.) It may
D-F79F/F7NT
vary substantially depending on an ambient environment.
D-A7쏔/A80 5 10
15 + 10 (n – 2)
D-A73C/A80C (n = 4, 6 ···) Note)

D-A7쏔H 5 10
15 + 15 (n – 2)
D-A80H (n = 4, 6 ···) Note)
Note) When “n” is an odd number, an even number that is one larger than this
odd number is used for the calculation. However, the minimum even
number is 4. So, 4 is used for the calculation when “n” is 1 to 3.

Auto Switch Mounting Brackets/Part No.

Bore size [mm]

Auto switch model
ø 20 to ø 100
D-M9쏔/M9쏔V BQ2-012
D-M9쏔W/M9쏔WV
D-M9쏔A/M9쏔AV BQ2-012S
Note 1) When ordering the auto switches other than D-M9쏔쏔쏔 and D-F7BA(V)
mentioned on the above, order auto switch mounting brackets BQ-1
separately.
Note 2) When adding D-M9쏔A(V), order a stainless steel screw set BBA2 together
with BQ2-012S separately.
When adding the auto switch D-F7BA(V), order a stainless steel screw set
BBA2 separately.

89
 Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol
13 Head Cover Axial Port -XC20

CG1
Head side port position is changed to the axial direction. (Standard head side port is plugged with hexagon socket head screw.)

Applicable Series Construction

Description Model Action Note

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion Connection port

CG1W
Standard
Standard type Single acting
CG1
(Spring return/extend)
Non-rotating rod type CG1K Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion
Direct mount,
CG1KR Double acting, Single rod Except with air cushion∗1

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Non-rotating rod type
∗1 The shape is the same as the existing product. Use the existing seal kit.

CG1
Bore size [mm] Port size
How to Order 20, 25, 32, 40 Rc1⁄8
Standard model no. XC20 50, 63 Rc1⁄4

Head cover axial port ∗ Same dimensions as standard type except port size.

Double Acting, Single Rod

Specifications: Same as standard type

CG1K
∗ Be sure to use the speed controller since head side
port has no throttle.

Non-rotating Rod
Symbol
14 Fluororubber Seal -XC22

Double Acting, Double Rod

CG1KW
Applicable Series Specifications
Description Model Action Note Seal material Fluororubber
Double acting, Cylinders with rubber Ambient temperature With auto switch Note 1) : −10 °C to 60 °C
CG1 (No freezing)
Single rod bumper have no bumper. range Without auto switch : −10 °C to 70 °C
Standard type
Double acting, Cylinders with rubber Specifications other

Double Acting, Single Rod

CG1W than above and Same as standard type
Double rod bumper have no bumper.

Direct Mount
external dimensions

CG1R
Double acting, Cylinders with rubber
Direct mount type CG1R Note 1) Please contact SMC, as the type of chemical and the operating
Single rod bumper have no bumper.
temperature may not allow the use of this product.
Note 2) Cylinders with auto switches can also be produced; however, auto
How to Order switch related parts (auto switch units, mounting brackets, built-in
magnets) are the same as standard products.
Standard model no. XC22 Before using these, please contact SMC regarding their suitability

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

for the operating environment.
Fluororubber seal

CG1KR
Symbol
15 Double Clevis and Double Knuckle Joint Pins Made of Stainless Steel -XC27
To prevent the oscillating portion of the double clevis or the double knuckle joint from rusting, the material of the pin and the retaining ring has
been changed to stainless steel.
With End Lock

CBG1

Applicable Series How to Order

Description Model Action Note
CG1D Standard model no. XC27
Double acting, Except with rod end
CG1
Single rod bracket Double clevis type Double clevis pin made
Standard type
Single acting Except with rod end of stainless steel
CG1
Auto Switch

(Spring return/extend) bracket

Non-rotating Double acting, Except with rod end Y G02, G03, G04, G05, G08, G10 XC27
CG1K
rod type Single rod bracket
Double knuckle joint Double knuckle joint pin
Specifications made of stainless steel
Mounting Only double clevis type (D), double knuckle joint
Made to Order

Pin and retaining

IY G02, G03, G04, G05, G08, G10 XC27
Stainless steel 304
ring material
CD G02, G25, G03, G04, G05, G06 XC27
Additional
Same as standard type
specifications Clevis pin Clevis pin
made of stainless steel
Knuckle pin Knuckle pin
90
Series CG1

Symbol
16 Double Knuckle Joint with Spring Pin -XC29
To prevent loosening of the double knuckle joint

Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard type

Description Model Action Note
CG1 Double acting, Single rod Except with rod end bracket Dimensions: Same as standard type
Standard type
CG1 Single acting/spring return type (S) Except with rod end bracket

How to Order
Standard model no. XC29
Double knuckle joint with spring pin

Symbol
17 With Coil Scraper -XC35
It gets rid of frost, ice, weld spatter, cutting chips adhered to the piston rod, and protects the seals etc.

Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard type

Description Model Action Note
Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod

How to Order
Standard model no. XC35
With coil scraper

Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as standard type.)
[mm]
Scraper bracket Bore Stroke range H ZZ
mounting bolt M FA FA I2 M
size Standard Long stroke Male thread Female thread Male thread Female thread
20 Up to 200 201 to 1500 6 39 27 27 4 110 (118) 98 (106)
25 Up to 300 301 to 1500 6 44 28 32 5 115 (123) 99 (107)
øI2

32 Up to 300 301 to 1500 6 44 28 38 5 117 (125) 101 (109)

40 Up to 300 301 to 1500 7 54 29 47 6 134 (143) 109 (118)
50 Up to 300 301 to 1500 7 62 30 58 8 154 (166) 122 (134)
H 63 Up to 300 301 to 1500 7 62 30 72 10 154 (166) 122 (134)
ZZ + Stroke Note) ( ): Long stroke
∗ Other dimensions are the same as double acting, single rod, standard type.
∗ On the axial foot and the rod flange types, the mounting bracket is wedged
and bolted between the cylinder and the scraper at the time of shipment.
On other types, it is placed in the same package, (but not assembled).
∗ The long stroke shows the maximum manufacturable stroke. For details
about maximum stroke that can be used for each mounting bracket, contact
SMC.

Symbol
18 Larger Throttle Diameter of Connection Port -XC37
This is a cylinder with a piping port larger than the standard type.

Applicable Series Dimensions (Throttle diameter of connection port) Dimensions other than below
are the same as standard type.
Description Model Action Note
Standard type CG1 Double acting, Single rod ∗ Except ø 80, ø 100 [mm]
Double acting, Except with air cushion Bore size With rubber bumper With air cushion Standard type
Double rod type CG1W 20
Double rod ∗ Except ø 80, ø 100 5 3 (2.1)
25 5 3.5 (2.5)
How to Order 32 6 (3.3)

Standard model no. XC37 40 7 (3.9)

50 9 (4.5)
Larger throttle diameter of connection port 63 9 (5.7)
∗ Use external stopper etc. not to be damaged with cylinder
Specifications: Same as standard type cover directly if exceeding the range of kinetic energy
absorption.
91
 Made to Order Series CG1

Double Acting, Single Rod

Symbol
19 Built-in Shock Absorber in Head Cover Side -XC42

CG1
A type of the CG1 series air cylinder in which a special shock absorber is enclosed in the head portion so that its ability to absorb energy during the
retraction of the cylinder is considerably greater than the conventional air cushion.

Applicable Series Specifications

Double Acting, Double Rod

Description Model Action Note Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s

CG1W
Standard
Double acting, Additional specifications Same as standard type
Standard type CG1
Single rod
∗ On the axial foot and head flange types, the bracket is mounted at the
time of shipment. Others are shipped together, (but not assembled).
How to Order
Standard model no. XC42

Single Acting, Spring Return/Extend

Built-in shock absorber in head cover side

CG1
Double Acting, Single Rod
CG1K
Dimensions (Dimensions other than below are the same as the CG1 long stroke type.)

Non-rotating Rod
Shock absorber [mm]
Bore size Stroke range Shock absorber S MH ZZ

Double Acting, Double Rod

20 10 to 350 RBAC0806 77 23.5 135.5

CG1KW
25 10 to 400 RBAC1007 77 31 148
32 15 to 450 RBAC1412 79 55 174
40 15 to 800 RBAC2015 87 62.5 199.5

S + Stroke MH 50 15 to 1200 RBAC2015 102 55.5 215.5

ZZ + Stroke 63 25 to 1200 RBAC2725 102 92.5 252.5
∗ Shock absorbers are consumables.

Double Acting, Single Rod

The specifications for shock absorbers are the same as those for the

Direct Mount

CG1R
RBC첸첸첸첸, but use the RBAC첸첸첸첸 when an external pressure is
The shock absorber service life is different from that of the
applied such as for a built-in cylinder. The maximum absorption energy
CG1 cylinder. Refer to the RB series Specific Product may decrease depending on the operating conditions.
Precautions for the replacement period.

Direct Mount, Non-rotating Rod

CG1KR
With End Lock

CBG1
Auto Switch
Made to Order

92
Series CG1

Symbol
20 Grease for Food Processing Equipment -XC85
Food grade grease (certified by NSF-H1) is used as lubricant.

Applicable Series Specifications

Description Model Action Note Ambient temperature range –10 °C to 70 °C
CG1 Double acting, Single rod Seal material Nitrile rubber
Standard type
CG1W Double acting, Double rod Grease Grease for food
Direct mount type CG1R Double acting, Single rod Auto switch Mountable
Dimensions Same as standard type
How to Order Additional specifications Same as standard type
Standard model no. XC85
Grease for food processing equipment

Warning
Precautions
Be aware that smoking cigarettes etc. after your hands have come into
contact with the grease used in this cylinder can create a gas that is Food
ood zone
zon
hazardous to humans. Not installable
installa
Splash zone
z
Not installable zone Not
ot installable
insta

Food zone ·················· An environment where the raw materials and

materials of food products, semi-finished food
products and food products that make direct or Container
indirect contact in a normal processing process.
Splash zone ··············· An area where a portion of food products
accidentally splash and stick under the
intended operating conditions. An environment Food
where food products that enter this area do
not return to the food product contact portion
again, and are not used as food products.

Installable zone
Non-food zone ············ Other environments including the food splash Non-food zone
Installable
zone, except for the food contact portions.

Note 1) Avoid using this product in the food zone.

(Refer to the figure on the right.)
Note 2) When the product is used in an area of liquid splash, or a water
resistant function is required for the product, please consult SMC.
Note 3) Operate without lubrication from a pneumatic system lubricator.
Note 4) Use the following grease pack for the maintenance work.
GR-H-010 (Grease: 10 g)
Note 5) Please contact SMC for details about the maintenance intervals
for this cylinder, which differ from those of the standard cylinder.

Symbol
21 PTFE Grease -X446
Applicable Series Specifications: Same as standard type
Description Model Action Note
Double acting, Except with
Dimensions: Same as standard type
Standard type CG1
Single rod air cushion
∗ When grease is necessary for maintenance, grease pack is available,
please order it separately.
How to Order GR-F-005 (Grease: 5 g)
Standard model no. X446
PTFE grease

93
 These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or
Safety Instructions equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the
labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or “Danger.” They are all important notes for safety
and must be followed in addition to International Standards (ISO/IEC)∗1), and other
safety regulations.
Caution indicates a hazard with a low level of risk ∗1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
Caution: which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines.
Warning indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk (Part 1: General requirements)
Warning: which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
ISO 10218-1: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety.
etc.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
Danger : which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Warning Limited warranty and Disclaimer/

1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person Compliance Requirements
who designs the equipment or decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its
The product used is subject to the following “Limited warranty and
compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs the Disclaimer” and “Compliance Requirements”.
equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results. Read and accept them before using the product.
The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the
responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the product. This
person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its
latest catalogue information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of
Limited warranty and Disclaimer
equipment failure when configuring the equipment. 1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery after the product is delivered, wichever is first.∗2)
and equipment. Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly,
replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch.
operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be
performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly
3. Do
. not service or attempt to remove product and our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed other damage incurred due to the failure of the product.
after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven objects have been
confirmed. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalogue for the particular
above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read
products.
and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products carefully.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected ∗2) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
operation and malfunction. A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety pad or failure due to the deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited
measures if the product is to be used in any of the following warranty.
conditions.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in
a place exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation, Compliance Requirements
space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or 1. The use of SMC products with production equipment for the manufacture of
equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and
brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable weapons of mass destruction (WMD) or any other weapon is strictly
for the standard specifications described in the product catalogue. prohibited.
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals
2. The exports of SMC products or technology from one country to another are
requiring special safety analysis.
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible governed by the relevant security laws and regulations of the countries
failure by using a mechanical protective function, and periodical checks to confirm involved in the transaction. Prior to the shipment of a SMC product to
proper operation. another country, assure that all local rules governing that export are known
and followed.

Caution Caution
1. The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries. SMC products are not intended for use as instruments for legal
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing metrology.
industries. Measurement instruments that SMC manufactures or sells have not been qualified by
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange type approval tests relevant to the metrology (measurement) laws of each country.
specifications or a contract if necessary. Therefore, SMC products cannot be used for business or certification ordained by the
If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch. metrology (measurement) laws of each country.

Safety Instructions Be sure to read “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” (M-E03-3) before using.
SMC Corporation (Europe)
Austria +43 (0)2262622800 www.smc.at [email protected] Lithuania +370 5 2308118 www.smclt.lt [email protected]
Belgium +32 (0)33551464 www.smcpneumatics.be [email protected] Netherlands +31 (0)205318888 www.smcpneumatics.nl [email protected]
Bulgaria +359 (0)2807670 www.smc.bg [email protected] Norway +47 67129020 www.smc-norge.no [email protected]
Croatia +385 (0)13707288 www.smc.hr [email protected] Poland +48 222119600 www.smc.pl [email protected]
Czech Republic +420 541424611 www.smc.cz [email protected] Portugal +351 226166570 www.smc.eu [email protected]
Denmark +45 70252900 www.smcdk.com [email protected] Romania +40 213205111 www.smcromania.ro [email protected]
Estonia +372 6510370 www.smcpneumatics.ee [email protected] Russia +7 8127185445 www.smc-pneumatik.ru [email protected]
Finland +358 207513513 www.smc.fi [email protected] Slovakia +421 (0)413213212 www.smc.sk [email protected]
France +33 (0)164761000 www.smc-france.fr [email protected] Slovenia +386 (0)73885412 www.smc.si [email protected]
Germany +49 (0)61034020 www.smc.de [email protected] Spain +34 902184100 www.smc.eu [email protected]
Greece +30 210 2717265 www.smchellas.gr [email protected] Sweden +46 (0)86031200 www.smc.nu [email protected]
Hungary +36 23511390 www.smc.hu [email protected] Switzerland +41 (0)523963131 www.smc.ch [email protected]
Ireland +353 (0)14039000 www.smcpneumatics.ie [email protected] Turkey +90 212 489 0 440 www.smcpnomatik.com.tr [email protected]
Italy +39 0292711 www.smcitalia.it [email protected] UK +44 (0)845 121 5122 www.smcpneumatics.co.uk [email protected]
Latvia +371 67817700 www.smclv.lv [email protected]
SMC CORPORATION Akihabara UDX 15F, 4-14-1, Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPAN Phone: 03-5207-8249 FAX: 03-5298-5362
1st printing TU printing TU 00 Printed in Spain Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer.